{"title":"All Products","description":"\u003ch3\u003eStart with the setup you want to skate\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOC Ramps makes more than one kind of session possible. Shop transition ramps for pumping, kickturns and coping tricks; rails, boxes and ledges for grinds, slides and manuals; launch features for takeoff lines; and surface products for building or protecting the ramp you already have.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf the full assortment feels like too much at once, start with the \u003ca href=\"\/blogs\/buyers-guides\"\u003eOC Ramps buyer guides\u003c\/a\u003e. They walk through space, ramp shape, surfaces, budget and the other decisions that help turn a long product list into a useful shortlist.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCompare the feature, the footprint and the complete plan\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the feature for the way you want to skate, then check the exact product dimensions and configuration. A compact obstacle can still require a long approach and roll-away. A wider or taller ramp may change more than one dimension. Product names help you browse, but the selected product specifications should control the space plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThink beyond the product price too. Surface choices, site preparation, assembly, delivery access, installation help and ongoing care can all affect the project. The goal is not simply to find something that fits in the cart; it is to choose something that fits the session and the place where it will live.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eNarrow the assortment by the decision in front of you\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompare \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/halfpipe\"\u003ehalf pipes and mini ramps\u003c\/a\u003e for a connected transition setup, \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/quarter-pipes\"\u003equarter pipes\u003c\/a\u003e for a single transition, \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grind-boxes\"\u003egrind boxes and ledges\u003c\/a\u003e for platform-based street lines, or \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skate-rails\"\u003eskate rails\u003c\/a\u003e for a focused grinding feature. Shop \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps\u003c\/a\u003e when the line starts with a takeoff feature.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAlready planning the finish? Compare \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/ramp-surface\"\u003eramp surfaces\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skate-paint\"\u003eSkate Paint\u003c\/a\u003e as separate decisions. If standard products do not suit the site or the layout, explore \u003ca href=\"\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003ecustom skatepark builds\u003c\/a\u003e rather than forcing the project into a kit that does not fit.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"cody-dave-mini-ramp-the-equation-8ft-wide","title":"Cody and Dave Equation Mini Ramp - 8 Foot Wide","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Equation, with another line to work toward\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring Cody and Dave's Equation into your home sessions. The eight-foot-wide mini ramp starts with a three-and-a-half-foot transition, with an optional taller corner when you want a different line in the same setup. It comes as a kit, so you can build a signature ramp without starting from a stack of uncut lumber.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep the base, or add a \u003cem\u003etaller corner\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe standard Equation is three and a half feet tall. Choose the optional five-foot corner when you want a higher section to work into your runs without raising the whole ramp. That leaves a genuine choice: keep the base layout, or add variety at one corner. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you think through how height changes the skating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake room for the full run\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEight feet across and 22 feet eight inches from end to end give this ramp a different space requirement from a short garage mini. Mark out the body, then account for deck access and room to move around it. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan the surrounding area before the ramp becomes part of everyday life.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePick the surface beneath your wheels\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne plywood riding layer is included. You can select a second plywood layer, GatorSkins in Brown or Green, or Skatelite Pro. Those choices let you decide between exposed plywood and a separate riding panel without changing the Equation's height layout. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains what each material does and where a wood coating fits.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild the ramp, not every part\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled parts, counted hardware and photo instructions take the cutting and parts list out of your build. Bring a drill and allow an estimated four to six hours for assembly. If you would rather have help putting it together, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/installations\"\u003eOC Ramps installation services\u003c\/a\u003e can discuss the location and project with you.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep caring for the wood around the surface\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA separate riding panel does not cover every piece of wood in the ramp. Skate Paint is an optional coating for exposed plywood, not another riding layer and not a coating for GatorSkins or Skatelite. Keep the rest of the build in your care plan too. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you prepare for checks and maintenance between sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 8-foot-wide Cody and Dave Equation mini ramp kit in the selected height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne plywood riding-surface base layer, with the selected second-plywood or premium-surface upgrade added when chosen\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSix premium-surface sheets when GatorSkins or Skatelite Pro is selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe correct Skate Paint amount when selected: 1 gallon for bare plywood or 1 quart for exposed plywood with a premium surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCody and Dave Equation Mini Ramp - 8 Foot Wide freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBuild it yourself or add installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring a drill and plan 4 to 6 hours to assemble the kit. Paid installation is available by quote. Travel, timing, site preparation, and pricing are quoted for each project.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Cody and Dave Equation Mini Ramp - 8 Foot Wide\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Cody and Dave Equation Mini Ramp compare with the Garage Mini Ramp Kit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Equation model is fixed at eight feet wide, with a 3.5-foot base, a 22-foot-8-inch length, and one optional 5-foot corner. The Garage Mini stays 26 inches tall, is 15 feet 8 inches long at eight feet wide, and also comes in 12- and 16-foot widths. Choose the Equation for its taller signature layout; choose Garage when lower height or shorter finished length better fits the home space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Cody and Dave Equation Mini Ramp compare with the Turtle Half Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Equation is eight feet wide, 22 feet 8 inches long, and starts 3.5 feet tall; its single 5-foot corner is optional. The Turtle is 12 feet wide at the same length and base height, includes one 5-foot corner, and offers Turtle-specific board guards. Choose between footprint, whether the raised corner is optional or included, and the visual package.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the Cody and Dave Equation Mini Ramp - 8 Foot Wide?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Cody and Dave Equation Mini Ramp - 8 Foot Wide for repeated transition runs and progression on skills such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and linking tricks from wall to wall. The exact progression should match the rider's ability, the selected transition, and the clear skating area around the ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow much room should I plan around the Cody and Dave Equation Mini Ramp - 8 Foot Wide?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart with the assembled dimensions for the selected width, height, corner, and surface configuration. Then leave a clear approach, roll-away, deck access, and enough working room for assembly and maintenance. Confirm the actual site before ordering; the listed product footprint alone is not the same as a complete skating-area plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Cody and Dave Equation Mini Ramp - 8 Foot Wide if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan OC Ramps build a custom version of the Cody and Dave Equation Mini Ramp - 8 Foot Wide?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. If the standard width, height, transition, or corner layout does not fit the site or intended riding, start with OC Ramps' Custom Builds page. Share the usable footprint, rider needs, desired transition, access, and location so the project can be evaluated as a custom build instead of forcing a standard kit into the wrong space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eExplore custom skate ramp builds\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508649672887,"sku":"CD-H8","price":2999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508649738423,"sku":"CD-H8+2ndLayer","price":3348.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330376569071,"sku":"CD-H8+GSB-6","price":4313.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330376700143,"sku":"CD-H8+GSG-6","price":4313.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330376831215,"sku":"CD-H8+SL-6","price":4703.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39606459400375,"sku":"CD-H8+Gallon","price":3198.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39606521888951,"sku":"CD-H8+2ndLayer+Gallon","price":3547.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330376601839,"sku":"CD-H8+Quart+GSB-6","price":4392.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330376732911,"sku":"CD-H8+Quart+GSG-6","price":4392.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330376863983,"sku":"CD-H8+Quart+SL-6","price":4782.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508649705655,"sku":"CD-H8+Ext","price":3698.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508649771191,"sku":"CD-H8+2ndLayer+Ext","price":4047.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330376634607,"sku":"CD-H8+Ext+GSB-6","price":5012.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330376765679,"sku":"CD-H8+Ext+GSG-6","price":5012.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330376896751,"sku":"CD-H8+Ext+SL-6","price":5402.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39606554951863,"sku":"CD-H8+Ext+Gallon","price":3897.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39606597157047,"sku":"CD-H8+2ndLayer+Ext+Gallon","price":4246.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330376667375,"sku":"CD-H8+Ext+Quart+GSB-6","price":5091.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330376798447,"sku":"CD-H8+Ext+Quart+GSG-6","price":5091.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330376929519,"sku":"CD-H8+Ext+Quart+SL-6","price":5481.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/dave_beach_miniramp.jpg?v=1729241228"},{"product_id":"8-wide-halfpipe","title":"8 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMake another run part of your day\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA quick session can turn into the trick you have been chasing. The 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe gives you a connected ramp to skate back and forth at home, with a three-and-a-half-foot base height. Keep that layout or add a five-foot corner, then choose the surface for your own place to practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFind \u003cem\u003eanother run at home\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEight feet across gives you a complete half-pipe layout without taking on the width of the twelve- or sixteen-foot models. Link the transition runs, kickturns and coping tricks that suit your skating, with both walls connected by the ramp's flat section. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you compare that continuous route with two separate quarter pipes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdd height in one corner if you want it\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe base ramp is three and a half feet tall, eight feet wide and 22 feet eight inches long. The five-foot option adds one raised corner section; it does not make the whole ramp five feet tall. Leave room around the ramp and access to its decks as you picture that layout. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you map the base dimensions and selected corner.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild on the included plywood layer\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit starts with one plywood riding layer. Keep it, select a second plywood layer, or choose GatorSkins in Brown or Green or Skatelite Pro for the top riding surface. The sheet options are different materials, not different paint finishes. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how supporting wood, riding panels and coatings work together so you can choose the surface you intend to skate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose protection for the wood you expose\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAdd Skate Paint if you want a coating for the exposed plywood. It is a separate choice from GatorSkins or Skatelite, so choosing a riding panel does not automatically add paint to your order. Keep the coating off those panels and care for the wood elsewhere on the ramp. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan that upkeep alongside the surface you choose.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring the kit together with photo instructions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ramp arrives as pre-cut and pre-drilled components with counted hardware and photo instructions. Have a drill ready and allow about four to six hours as an assembly estimate, with the site prepared before you start. Prefer help with the build? \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/installations\"\u003eOC Ramps installation services\u003c\/a\u003e can quote your ramp and location, including the access and work the project needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 8-foot-wide half pipe ramp kit in the selected height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne plywood riding-surface base layer, with the selected second-plywood or premium-surface upgrade added when chosen\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSix premium-surface sheets when GatorSkins or Skatelite Pro is selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe correct Skate Paint amount when selected: 1 gallon for bare plywood or 1 quart for exposed plywood with a premium surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003e8 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBuild it yourself or add installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring a drill and plan 4 to 6 hours to assemble the kit. Paid installation is available by quote. Travel, timing, site preparation, and pricing are quoted for each project.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe compare with the 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe has a 3.5-foot base transition, measures 22 feet 8 inches long, and can add one 5-foot corner. The 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe keeps a 3-foot transition, offers 8-, 12-, or 16-foot widths, and measures 21 feet 8 inches long in its 8-foot version. Choose by transition layout first, then by site width.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen should I choose the 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe instead of the 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe is 8 feet wide, 22 feet 8 inches long, and 3.5 feet high at the base, with one optional 5-foot corner. The 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe begins at five feet, comes in 12- or 16-foot widths, uses a 30-foot base length for its 12-foot version, and can add one 7-foot corner. Choose by height and total site commitment, not surface alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp for repeated transition runs and progression on skills such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and linking tricks from wall to wall. The exact progression should match the rider's ability, the selected transition, and the clear skating area around the ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow much room should I plan around the 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart with the assembled dimensions for the selected width, height, corner, and surface configuration. Then leave a clear approach, roll-away, deck access, and enough working room for assembly and maintenance. Confirm the actual site before ordering; the listed product footprint alone is not the same as a complete skating-area plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan OC Ramps build a custom version of the 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. If the standard width, height, transition, or corner layout does not fit the site or intended riding, start with OC Ramps' Custom Builds page. Share the usable footprint, rider needs, desired transition, access, and location so the project can be evaluated as a custom build instead of forcing a standard kit into the wrong space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eExplore custom skate ramp builds\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508579385527,"sku":"sH:8","price":2899.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508579451063,"sku":"sH:8_stronger","price":3368.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330358874351,"sku":"sH:8+GSB-6","price":4213.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330358907119,"sku":"sH:8+GSG-6","price":4213.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330358939887,"sku":"sH:8+SL-6","price":4603.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39606168158391,"sku":"sH:8_1Gallon","price":3098.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39606228779191,"sku":"sH:8_stronger_1Gallon","price":3567.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330358972655,"sku":"sH:8_1Quart+GSB-6","price":4292.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330359005423,"sku":"sH:8_1Quart+GSG-6","price":4292.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330359038191,"sku":"sH:8_1Quart+SL-6","price":4682.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508579418295,"sku":"sH:8_taller","price":3598.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508579483831,"sku":"sH:8_taller_AND_stronger","price":4067.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330359070959,"sku":"sH:8_taller+GSB-6","price":4912.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330359103727,"sku":"sH:8_taller+GSG-6","price":4912.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330359136495,"sku":"sH:8_taller+SL-6","price":5302.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":40150006464695,"sku":"sH:8_taller_1Gallon","price":3797.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39606206890167,"sku":"sH:8_taller_AND_stronger_1Gallon","price":4266.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330359169263,"sku":"sH:8_taller_1Quart+GSB-6","price":4991.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330359202031,"sku":"sH:8_taller_1Quart+GSG-6","price":4991.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330359234799,"sku":"sH:8_taller_1Quart+SL-6","price":5381.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/8_ft_halfpipe2.jpg?v=1729241228"},{"product_id":"half-pipe-ramp-12-foot-wide","title":"12 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA wider place to find your rhythm\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMore room across the transition can give a familiar session somewhere new to go. The 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe brings a broad, connected ramp to your home spot, with a three-and-a-half-foot base and an optional five-foot corner. Choose the layout for the lines you want to link, then make the surface and build decisions around that ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUse \u003cem\u003etwelve feet across\u003c\/em\u003e the transition\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis model adds four feet of width beyond the eight-foot half pipe while retaining the three-and-a-half-foot base height. Choose that extra span because you will enjoy the room across the face and coping, not simply because a wider ramp is available. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you consider the width alongside the transition you want to return to.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the layout room around its taller corner\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe base measures twelve feet wide and 22 feet eight inches long. You can keep both transitions at the three-and-a-half-foot base or add one five-foot corner section. The corner adds a taller place to skate, not a new height across the entire ramp. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you account for the ramp, access around the decks and the selected layout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake the riding-surface choice deliberately\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne plywood riding layer comes with the kit. The selector also offers a second plywood layer, GatorSkins in Brown or Green, and Skatelite Pro. Brown and Green are separate color choices for GatorSkins; paint is a different option for exposed wood. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains those material roles before you choose what sits on top of the included base.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eInclude care for the whole wooden ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA wider ramp also gives you more wood to look after. Skate Paint is an optional coating for exposed plywood, separate from your riding-surface selection. Apply it to wood, not over GatorSkins or Skatelite panels. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan for decks, sides and other exposed areas so choosing a top surface does not leave the rest of the ramp out of your care routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTake the build from prepared parts to sessions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled components, counted hardware and a photo instruction booklet give you a defined kit to assemble. You will need a drill, with assembly estimated at five to seven hours. If the standard shape leaves an important part of your idea out, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eOC Ramps custom builds\u003c\/a\u003e can help you explore a different layout. Bring the site and the skating you want into the conversation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 12-foot-wide half pipe ramp kit in the selected height\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne plywood riding-surface base layer, with the selected second-plywood or premium-surface upgrade added when chosen\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNine premium-surface sheets when GatorSkins or Skatelite Pro is selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe correct Skate Paint amount when selected: 2 gallons for bare plywood or 1 quart for exposed plywood with a premium surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003e12 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBuild it yourself or add installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring a drill and plan 5 to 7 hours to assemble the kit. Paid installation is available by quote. Travel, timing, site preparation, and pricing are quoted for each project.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe compare with the Garage Mini Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe has a 3.5-foot base transition, a 22-foot-8-inch length, and one optional 5-foot corner. The Garage Mini Ramp stays 26 inches tall, offers 8-, 12-, or 16-foot widths, and uses a tighter transition. Choose the 12-foot half pipe for the taller session; choose Garage Mini when lower home-scale geometry is the better fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat corner-layout flexibility does the 16-foot model add beyond this 12-foot half pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth models start at 3.5 feet tall and 22 feet 8 inches long. The 12-foot ramp can add one 5-foot corner, while the 16-foot ramp can add one or two. Choose twelve feet when one raised side is enough; choose sixteen when the site supports the extra width and two raised corners matter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp for repeated transition runs and progression on skills such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and linking tricks from wall to wall. The exact progression should match the rider's ability, the selected transition, and the clear skating area around the ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow much room should I plan around the 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart with the assembled dimensions for the selected width, height, corner, and surface configuration. Then leave a clear approach, roll-away, deck access, and enough working room for assembly and maintenance. Confirm the actual site before ordering; the listed product footprint alone is not the same as a complete skating-area plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan OC Ramps build a custom version of the 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. If the standard width, height, transition, or corner layout does not fit the site or intended riding, start with OC Ramps' Custom Builds page. Share the usable footprint, rider needs, desired transition, access, and location so the project can be evaluated as a custom build instead of forcing a standard kit into the wrong space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eExplore custom skate ramp builds\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508634140855,"sku":"H12","price":3799.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508634206391,"sku":"H12+2ndLayer","price":4468.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330394624239,"sku":"H12+GSB-9","price":5770.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330394755311,"sku":"H12+GSG-9","price":5770.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330394886383,"sku":"H12+SL-9","price":6355.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39606882697399,"sku":"H12+2xGallons","price":4197.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39606894887095,"sku":"H12+2ndLayer+2xGallons","price":4866.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330394657007,"sku":"H12+1Quart+GSB-9","price":5849.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330394788079,"sku":"H12+1Quart+GSG-9","price":5849.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330394919151,"sku":"H12+1Quart+SL-9","price":6434.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508634173623,"sku":"H12+Ext","price":4598.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508634239159,"sku":"H12+2ndLayer+Ext","price":5267.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330394689775,"sku":"H12+Ext+GSB-9","price":6569.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330394820847,"sku":"H12+Ext+GSG-9","price":6569.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330394951919,"sku":"H12+Ext+SL-9","price":7154.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39606890856631,"sku":"H12+Ext+2xGallons","price":4996.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39606903406775,"sku":"H12+2ndLayer+Ext+2xGallons","price":5665.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330394722543,"sku":"H12+Ext+1Quart+GSB-9","price":6648.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330394853615,"sku":"H12+Ext+1Quart+GSG-9","price":6648.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330394984687,"sku":"H12+Ext+1Quart+SL-9","price":7233.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/12halfpipe.jpg?v=1729241228"},{"product_id":"cody-mcentire-mini-ramp-the-equation-24ft-wide","title":"Cody McEntire Equation Mini Ramp - 24 Foot Wide","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTwenty-four feet to find your line\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCody McEntire's Equation gives home sessions a broad span of transition, with a choice of one or two taller corners. It is for a space where the extra width can become part of the skating, not just a bigger footprint. Choose the corner layout you want, then build from the supplied parts and photo instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003e\n\u003cem\u003eTwenty-four feet\u003c\/em\u003e, finished your way\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 24-foot span gives you room to vary your approach across the transition. The kit arrives in natural plywood, not with the painted finish shown in some completed setups. Choose it for the layout you want to skate, then plan the finish as part of your own build rather than expecting a pictured color scheme to arrive ready-made.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose zero, one or two raised corners\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep the base layout, add one four-foot corner, or choose two four-foot corners. The extensions give you higher sections within the same ramp rather than raising the whole half pipe to that height. Pick the arrangement around the lines you want to link from one wall to the other.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose a surface for the full span\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne plywood riding layer comes with the kit. A second plywood layer, GatorSkins in Brown or Green, and Skatelite Pro are selectable options. Skate Paint is a separate choice for exposed wood, not a substitute for those riding panels. Use the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e to understand the materials before selecting the finish for all 24 feet of width.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSet aside time to enjoy the build\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is a kit project measured in days, with an estimated two-day assembly using a drill. Pre-cut and pre-drilled parts, counted hardware and photo instructions save you from fabricating the entire ramp yourself. Give the pieces a clear staging area, or explore \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/installations\"\u003eOC Ramps installation services\u003c\/a\u003e if you want the build handled as a quoted project.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the whole setup room to work\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ramp body is 24 feet wide and 22 feet eight inches long. Walk that area before committing to the build, including routes to the decks and space for parts during assembly. If the site calls for a different span or layout, explore \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eOC Ramps custom builds\u003c\/a\u003e for a ramp designed around your space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 24-foot-wide Cody McEntire Equation mini ramp kit in the selected height layout\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne plywood riding-surface base layer, with the selected second-plywood or premium-surface upgrade added when chosen\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEighteen premium-surface sheets when GatorSkins or Skatelite Pro is selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe configured 2-gallon Skate Paint amount when paint protection is selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCody McEntire Equation Mini Ramp - 24 Foot Wide freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBuild it yourself or add installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring a drill and plan about 2 days to assemble the kit. Paid installation is available by quote. Travel, timing, site preparation, and pricing are quoted for each project.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Cody McEntire Equation Mini Ramp - 24 Foot Wide\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 24 Foot Cody McEntire Equation compare with the 8 Foot Cody and Dave Equation?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 24-foot Cody McEntire model starts at 3 feet tall and can add one or two 4-foot corners. The 8-foot Cody and Dave model starts at 3.5 feet and can add one 5-foot corner. Both are 22 feet 8 inches long, but their width and height menus are different. Choose the exact span and corner pattern the site can support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 24 Foot Wide Cody McEntire Equation Mini Ramp compare with the Turtle Half Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth ramps are 22 feet 8 inches long, but their width and height plans differ. Cody McEntire's Equation is 24 feet wide, starts at 3 feet, and can use zero, one, or two 4-foot corners. The Turtle is 12 feet wide, starts at 3.5 feet, and includes one 5-foot corner plus optional board guards. Choose broad configurable symmetry or the narrower fixed-corner Turtle package.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the Cody McEntire Equation Mini Ramp - 24 Foot Wide?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Cody McEntire Equation Mini Ramp - 24 Foot Wide for repeated transition runs and progression on skills such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and linking tricks from wall to wall. The exact progression should match the rider's ability, the selected transition, and the clear skating area around the ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow much room should I plan around the Cody McEntire Equation Mini Ramp - 24 Foot Wide?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart with the assembled dimensions for the selected width, height, corner, and surface configuration. Then leave a clear approach, roll-away, deck access, and enough working room for assembly and maintenance. Confirm the actual site before ordering; the listed product footprint alone is not the same as a complete skating-area plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Cody McEntire Equation Mini Ramp - 24 Foot Wide if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan OC Ramps build a custom version of the Cody McEntire Equation Mini Ramp - 24 Foot Wide?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. If the standard width, height, transition, or corner layout does not fit the site or intended riding, start with OC Ramps' Custom Builds page. Share the usable footprint, rider needs, desired transition, access, and location so the project can be evaluated as a custom build instead of forcing a standard kit into the wrong space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eExplore custom skate ramp builds\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"3 ft \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508672250039,"sku":"sH16-1","price":7799.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 ft \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508672348343,"sku":"sH16-1_stronger","price":8968.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435223791,"sku":"sH16-1+GSB-18","price":11741.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435420399,"sku":"sH16-1+GSG-18","price":11741.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 ft \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330435617007,"sku":"sH16-1+SL-18","price":12911.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 ft \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39580222292151,"sku":"sH16-1_2Gallon","price":8197.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 ft \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39580224258231,"sku":"sH16-1_stronger_and_2Gallon","price":9366.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435256559,"sku":"sH16-1_2Gallon+GSB-18","price":12139.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435453167,"sku":"sH16-1_2Gallon+GSG-18","price":12139.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 ft \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330435649775,"sku":"sH16-1_2Gallon+SL-18","price":13309.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508672282807,"sku":"sH16-1_extension","price":8773.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508672381111,"sku":"sH16-1_stronger_and_extension","price":9942.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435289327,"sku":"sH16-1_extension+GSB-18","price":12715.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435485935,"sku":"sH16-1_extension+GSG-18","price":12715.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330435682543,"sku":"sH16-1_extension+SL-18","price":13885.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39580222718135,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_and_2Gallon","price":9171.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39580225110199,"sku":"sH16-1_stronger_and_extension_and_2Gallon","price":10340.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435322095,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_and_2Gallon+GSB-18","price":13113.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435518703,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_and_2Gallon+GSG-18","price":13113.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330435715311,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_and_2Gallon+SL-18","price":14283.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (2 corner extension) \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508672315575,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_X2","price":9032.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (2 corner extension) \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508672413879,"sku":"sH16-1_stronger_and_extension_X2","price":10201.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (2 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435354863,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_X2+GSB-18","price":12974.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (2 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435551471,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_X2+GSG-18","price":12974.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (2 corner extension) \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330435748079,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_X2+SL-18","price":14144.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (2 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39580223439031,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_X2_and_2Gallon","price":9430.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (2 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39580226715831,"sku":"sH16-1_stronger_and_extension_X2_and_2Gallon","price":10599.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (2 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435387631,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_X2_and_2Gallon+GSB-18","price":13372.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (2 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330435584239,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_X2_and_2Gallon+GSG-18","price":13372.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"4 ft (2 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330435780847,"sku":"sH16-1_extension_X2_and_2Gallon+SL-18","price":14542.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/cody_miniramp.jpg?v=1729241229"},{"product_id":"halfpipe-5-tall","title":"5 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBring a five-foot transition to your home sessions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen a lower mini is not the transition you want to skate, this five-foot half pipe gives you a taller base with 12- or 16-foot widths. An optional seven-foot corner adds a higher section without raising the entire ramp. Start with the riding you have in mind, then give this larger kit the space and build time it needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose \u003cem\u003eheight and width\u003c\/em\u003e for different reasons\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth width options keep the five-foot base height. Twelve feet gives you one span across the ramp; sixteen adds another four feet of width without changing that base height. Choose the width for the approaches you want to use, not as a substitute for deciding whether a five-foot transition is right for your skating. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains the distinction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eRaise one corner to seven feet\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe seven-foot option raises one corner, leaving the rest of the base ramp at five feet. It gives you a higher section to choose during a run rather than committing every approach to seven feet. Consider who will skate that corner and the lines they want before making it part of the order.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStart with two plywood layers, then choose the top\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo plywood riding layers are included. Choose a third plywood layer, GatorSkins in Brown or Green, or Skatelite Pro if you want one of those surface options. Optional Skate Paint serves the exposed wood rather than adding a riding sheet. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you distinguish what goes under your wheels from how the remaining plywood is cared for.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMeasure a thirty-foot ramp before the build\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 12-foot-wide base model measures 30 feet long. Lay out that body along with deck access, routes around it and room to assemble the parts. Work from the selected configuration when planning a wider or extended version. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you separate the ramp's dimensions from the total area you will need.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eA bigger build, with the fabrication already done\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit supplies pre-cut and pre-drilled parts, computer-cut transitions, counted hardware and photo instructions. Assembly is estimated at one to two days with a drill, so set aside a proper work area and time to follow the sequence. Explore \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/installations\"\u003eOC Ramps installation services\u003c\/a\u003e when you want help with a project of this size.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne halfpipe ramp kit in the selected 5- or 7-foot height layout and 12- or 16-foot width\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo plywood riding-surface base layers, with the selected third-plywood or premium-surface upgrade added when chosen\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwelve or 16 premium-surface sheets when selected, matched to the ramp width\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe correct Skate Paint amount for the selected width and surface when paint protection is selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003e5 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBuild it yourself or add installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring a drill and plan 1 to 2 days to assemble the kit. Paid installation is available by quote. Travel, timing, site preparation, and pricing are quoted for each project.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe compare with the 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe starts at five feet, offers 12- or 16-foot widths, uses a 30-foot base length for its 12-foot version, and can add one 7-foot corner. The 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe keeps a three-foot transition across 8-, 12-, or 16-foot widths. Choose the taller model only when its greater height and footprint serve the intended riders and site.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe compare with the 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe begins at five feet and uses a 30-foot length for its base 12-foot-wide version, with one optional 7-foot corner. The 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe starts 3.5 feet tall, runs 22 feet 8 inches long, and can add one 5-foot corner. Choose the transition scale and finished length before comparing surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp for repeated transition runs and progression on skills such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and linking tricks from wall to wall. The exact progression should match the rider's ability, the selected transition, and the clear skating area around the ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow much room should I plan around the 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart with the assembled dimensions for the selected width, height, corner, and surface configuration. Then leave a clear approach, roll-away, deck access, and enough working room for assembly and maintenance. Confirm the actual site before ordering; the listed product footprint alone is not the same as a complete skating-area plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan OC Ramps build a custom version of the 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. If the standard width, height, transition, or corner layout does not fit the site or intended riding, start with OC Ramps' Custom Builds page. Share the usable footprint, rider needs, desired transition, access, and location so the project can be evaluated as a custom build instead of forcing a standard kit into the wrong space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eExplore custom skate ramp builds\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"5' Tall x 12' Wide \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508687388855,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 12' Wide","price":7699.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 12' Wide \/ No \/ 3 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508687519927,"sku":"sH5tall_3Plywood_5' Tall x 12' Wide","price":8598.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 12' Wide \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445414639,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 12' Wide+GSB-12","price":10327.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 12' Wide \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445676783,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 12' Wide+GSG-12","price":10327.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 12' Wide \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330445938927,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 12' Wide+SL-12","price":11107.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 12' Wide \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508687421623,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 12' Wide_and_2Gallon","price":8097.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 12' Wide \/ Yes \/ 3 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508687552695,"sku":"sH5tall_3Plywood_5' Tall x 12' Wide_2Gallon","price":8996.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 12' Wide \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445447407,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 12' Wide_and_1Quart+GSB-12","price":10406.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 12' Wide \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445709551,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 12' Wide_and_1Quart+GSG-12","price":10406.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 12' Wide \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330445971695,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 12' Wide_and_1Quart+SL-12","price":11186.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 16' Wide \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39607261921463,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 16' Wide","price":10498.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 16' Wide \/ No \/ 3 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39607303504055,"sku":"sH5tall_3Plywood_and_5' Tall x 16' Wide","price":11397.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 16' Wide \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445480175,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 16' Wide+GSB-16","price":14002.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 16' Wide \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445742319,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 16' Wide+GSG-16","price":14002.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 16' Wide \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330446004463,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 16' Wide+SL-16","price":15042.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 16' Wide \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39607281189047,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 16' Wide_and_2Gallon","price":10896.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 16' Wide \/ Yes \/ 3 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39607326671031,"sku":"sH5tall_3Plywood_and_5' Tall x 16' Wide_and_2Gallon","price":11795.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 16' Wide \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445512943,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 16' Wide_and_1Gallon+GSB-16","price":14201.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 16' Wide \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445775087,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 16' Wide_and_1Gallon+GSG-16","price":14201.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5' Tall x 16' Wide \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330446037231,"sku":"H5tall_5' Tall x 16' Wide_and_1Gallon+SL-16","price":15241.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508687454391,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide","price":8548.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide \/ No \/ 3 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508687585463,"sku":"sH5tall_3Plywood_and_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide","price":9447.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445545711,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide+GSB-12","price":11176.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445807855,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide+GSG-12","price":11176.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330446069999,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide+SL-12","price":11956.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39607378477239,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide_and_2Gallon","price":8946.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide \/ Yes \/ 3 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39607392239799,"sku":"sH5tall_3Plywood_and_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide_and_2Gallon","price":9845.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445578479,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide_and_1Quart+GSB-12","price":11255.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445840623,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide_and_1Quart+GSG-12","price":11255.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330446102767,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 12' Wide_and_1Quart+SL-12","price":12035.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39607356915895,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide","price":11347.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide \/ No \/ 3 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39607396532407,"sku":"sH5tall_3Plywood_and_7'Tall (1corner extension) x 16' Wide","price":12246.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445611247,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide+GSB-16","price":14851.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445873391,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide+GSG-16","price":14851.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330446135535,"sku":"H5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide+SL-16","price":15891.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508687487159,"sku":"sH5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide_and_2Gallon","price":11745.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide \/ Yes \/ 3 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508687618231,"sku":"sH5tall_3Plywood_and_7'Tall(1cornerextension)x16'Wide_and_2Gallon","price":12644.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445644015,"sku":"sH5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide_and_1Gallon+GSB-16","price":15050.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330445906159,"sku":"sH5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide_and_1Gallon+GSG-16","price":15050.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330446168303,"sku":"sH5tall_7' Tall (1 corner extension) x 16' Wide_and_1Gallon+SL-16","price":16090.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/sb_ramp-1.jpg?v=1729241228"},{"product_id":"half-pipe-ramp-16-foot-wide","title":"16 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGive your home sessions room to stretch out\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen the site can give it room, a sixteen-foot-wide half pipe becomes a place to keep finding new lines. Start with the three-and-a-half-foot base, then choose no raised corners, one five-foot corner or two. This is a broad connected ramp to build your skating around, with surface options and help from OC Ramps when your idea goes beyond the standard layout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePut \u003cem\u003esixteen feet of width\u003c\/em\u003e to use\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe sixteen-foot span gives you more room across the transitions than the twelve-foot model while keeping the same base height. Think about the approaches and coping lines you actually want to skate across that width. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you weigh the wider face against a taller transition, so the extra ramp serves the session rather than just filling the site.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose where a taller corner belongs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep the three-and-a-half-foot base or add one or two five-foot corner extensions. Those options raise corner sections, not the whole ramp. The base is sixteen feet wide and 22 feet eight inches long, so allow room for deck access and the surrounding work area as well. Use the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e to picture the exact corner arrangement in your site.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSeparate the wood layer from the riding panel\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne plywood riding layer is included. You can add a second plywood layer or select a separate top surface in GatorSkins Brown, GatorSkins Green or Skatelite Pro. The plywood supports the riding surface; the optional panels determine what your wheels contact. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you compare those choices and understand where a protective coating fits into the build.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan paint for more than the riding face\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose Skate Paint separately if you want a coating for exposed plywood. Even with GatorSkins or Skatelite on top, the decks, sides and other wood areas still deserve attention. Keep paint off the riding panels and plan the work around the wood you will coat. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you understand the upkeep before committing to a ramp of this size.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the big build a clear starting point\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit includes prepared wood components, counted hardware and photo instructions, with a drill required and an estimated six to ten hours of assembly. Prepare the site and room to organize the parts before starting. If the width, transition or corner layout you want falls outside this kit, talk with \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eOC Ramps custom builds\u003c\/a\u003e about a ramp designed around your riders and property.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 16-foot-wide half pipe ramp kit in the selected height layout\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne plywood riding-surface base layer, with the selected second-plywood or premium-surface upgrade added when chosen\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwelve premium-surface sheets when GatorSkins or Skatelite Pro is selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe correct Skate Paint amount when selected: 2 gallons for bare plywood or 1 gallon for exposed plywood with a premium surface\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003e16 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBuild it yourself or add installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring a drill and plan 6 to 10 hours to assemble the kit. Paid installation is available by quote. Travel, timing, site preparation, and pricing are quoted for each project.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 16 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does this 16-foot-wide model differ from the 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis 16-foot model starts 3.5 feet tall, runs 22 feet 8 inches long, and can add one or two 5-foot corners. The 5 Foot Tall Halfpipe starts at five feet, uses a 30-foot base length for its 12-foot-wide version, also offers a 16-foot width, and can add one 7-foot corner. Choose width-first lower geometry or a fundamentally taller ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow do the corner choices compare with the 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth standard half pipes begin at 3.5 feet tall and 22 feet 8 inches long. The 12-foot model can add one 5-foot corner. This 16-foot model can add one or two, so it is the choice when the broader site and intended session justify a second raised side.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the 16 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the 16 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp for repeated transition runs and progression on skills such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and linking tricks from wall to wall. The exact progression should match the rider's ability, the selected transition, and the clear skating area around the ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow much room should I plan around the 16 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart with the assembled dimensions for the selected width, height, corner, and surface configuration. Then leave a clear approach, roll-away, deck access, and enough working room for assembly and maintenance. Confirm the actual site before ordering; the listed product footprint alone is not the same as a complete skating-area plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 16 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan OC Ramps build a custom version of the 16 Foot Wide Half Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. If the standard width, height, transition, or corner layout does not fit the site or intended riding, start with OC Ramps' Custom Builds page. Share the usable footprint, rider needs, desired transition, access, and location so the project can be evaluated as a custom build instead of forcing a standard kit into the wrong space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eExplore custom skate ramp builds\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508904738999,"sku":"H16","price":4649.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508904837303,"sku":"H16+2ndLayer","price":5848.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417627375,"sku":"H16+GSB-12","price":7277.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417823983,"sku":"H16+GSG-12","price":7277.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330418020591,"sku":"H16+SL-12","price":8057.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39606947053751,"sku":"H16+2xGallons","price":5047.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39606954262711,"sku":"H16+2ndLayer+2xGallons","price":6246.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417660143,"sku":"H16+1Gallon+GSB-12","price":7476.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417856751,"sku":"H16+1Gallon+GSG-12","price":7476.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.5 ft \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330418053359,"sku":"H16+1Gallon+SL-12","price":8256.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508904771767,"sku":"H16+Ext","price":5448.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508904870071,"sku":"H16+2ndLayer+Ext","price":6647.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417692911,"sku":"H16+Ext+GSB-12","price":8076.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417889519,"sku":"H16+Ext+GSG-12","price":8076.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330418086127,"sku":"H16+Ext+SL-12","price":8856.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39606950035639,"sku":"H16+Ext+2xGallons","price":5846.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39606961569975,"sku":"H16+2ndLayer+Ext+2xGallons","price":7045.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417725679,"sku":"H16+Ext+1Gallon+GSB-12","price":8275.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417922287,"sku":"H16+Ext+1Gallon+GSG-12","price":8275.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (1 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330418118895,"sku":"H16+Ext+1Gallon+SL-12","price":9055.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (2 corner extension) \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508904804535,"sku":"H16+2xExt","price":5598.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (2 corner extension) \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508904902839,"sku":"H16+2ndLayer+2xExt","price":6797.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (2 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417758447,"sku":"H16+2xExt+GSB-12","price":8226.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (2 corner extension) \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417955055,"sku":"H16+2xExt+GSG-12","price":8226.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (2 corner extension) \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330418151663,"sku":"H16+2xExt+SL-12","price":9006.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (2 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39606951903415,"sku":"H16+2xExt+2xGallons","price":5996.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (2 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39606957801655,"sku":"H16+2ndLayer+2xExt+2xGallons","price":7195.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (2 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417791215,"sku":"H16+2xExt+1Gallon+GSB-12","price":8425.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (2 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50330417987823,"sku":"H16+2xExt+1Gallon+GSG-12","price":8425.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 ft (2 corner extension) \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50330418184431,"sku":"H16+2xExt+1Gallon+SL-12","price":9205.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/16halfpipe-malibu.jpg?v=1729241228"},{"product_id":"bump-to-butter","title":"Bump to Butter Skate Obstacle","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBring a bump into your rail session\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBump to Butter pairs a twelve-inch bump with a seventeen-inch rail for a different approach to grinds and slides. The Butter surface uses a custom plastic composite, giving this setup a distinct rail to work on as you plan the next trick in your line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePut the \u003cem\u003ebump into the approach\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe twelve-inch bump changes the approach to the seventeen-inch rail. Choose this feature when you want to work on taking a trick from a ramp onto a rail, with repeated attempts on the same setup. Plan the run-in and landing space around the trick you want to practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMeet the Butter surface\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Butter sliding surface is a custom plastic composite, rather than the metal surface of a traditional skate rail. If grinds and slides are the focus of your sessions, that material is a key part of choosing this setup. Get familiar with its feel as you work on the tricks you want to repeat.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose whether to add the flat section\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose Bump only or Bump + Flat Section. The optional flat section adds thirty inches to the setup, so include that extra length when planning your spot. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you leave room for the approach and roll-away as well as the obstacle itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild it with a drill and photo instructions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBump to Butter arrives in kit form with an instruction manual and photos. Allow an estimated one to two hours for assembly using a drill. Set out the parts before starting so you can follow the build sequence and prepare the feature for its place in your line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eInclude wood care in the build\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePlan for one quart of Skate Paint for the wooden ramp sections. Account for applying the coating before the first session, then keep the ramp's care in your routine. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you look after the setup as the sessions add up.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Bump to Butter kit in the selected configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBump to Butter has an estimated one-to-two-hour assembly window and requires a drill. Build the bump, rail, and Butter surface as one connected feature, then confirm their alignment on level pavement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Bump to Butter Skate Obstacle\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does Bump to Butter differ from Bump to Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBump to Butter uses a custom plastic composite for its sliding feature. Bump to Rail offers a welded rail obstacle. Compare the type of grind or slide you want to work on and the material you prefer under your board or trucks.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat is the difference between Bump only and Bump + Flat Section?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBump + Flat Section adds a flat section that extends the setup by thirty inches. Choose Bump only for the version without that extension, or add the flat section when the extra length serves the line you want to skate. Include the extension in your space plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow do I choose between this combo and separate obstacles?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart with the route you want to skate and whether the same bump-and-slide approach will get regular use. If you want to place obstacles on different routes, compare individual products and their setup requirements. For Bump to Butter, choose between the Bump only and Bump + Flat Section versions to suit your plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the Bump to Butter Skate Obstacle?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Bump to Butter Skate Obstacle as a line-building obstacle for launches, ollies, and other tricks that fit its exact shape. Give the feature a straight approach and clear landing or exit, then progress from basic rollovers and controlled launches within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Bump to Butter Skate Obstacle if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps and obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Bump only","offer_id":39508938064055,"sku":"BumpToButter","price":599.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Bump + Flat Section","offer_id":39508938031287,"sku":"BumpToButter+FlatSection","price":828.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/bump1.jpg?v=1729241229"},{"product_id":"blue-tile-quarterpipe-by-brad-mcclain","title":"Brad McClain Blue Tile Quarter Pipe","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA little Blue Tile in your home sessions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA ramp can be something you want to skate and something you love seeing in the setup. Brad McClain's Blue Tile Quarter Pipe brings its signature design to a two-foot-tall transition, with four feet of width for your approach. Put the kit together, leave room for another run and bring a little more skating into an ordinary day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose the \u003cem\u003eBlue Tile character\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Blue Tile design belongs to this Brad McClain quarter pipe. It gives the ramp a different visual identity from a plain transition, while its two-foot height keeps the skating choice clear. Choose it when you want that signature look in the place you return to for kickturns and coping practice. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you think through the transition as well as the design.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFour feet wide does not mean four feet tall\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis ramp stands two feet tall and measures four feet wide by four feet deep. That makes it lower and shallower than the standard four-foot-wide quarter pipe. Leave clear ground to ride toward the transition and return from it; the ramp body is only part of the space you will use. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you measure the complete session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the exposed wood its own protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current choices are no Skate Paint or one quart. Use the coating on exposed plywood, leaving the Blue Tile artwork uncovered. Paint is not a separate riding-surface sheet, and this model has no Skatelite or GatorSkins option. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains the cleaning, inspection and upkeep that belong alongside your coating choice, especially for a ramp kept outdoors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild from parts prepared for this ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOC Ramps supplies pre-cut and pre-drilled wood parts, counted screws, required metal parts and a photo instruction booklet. You will need a drill, with assembly estimated at about 45 to 60 minutes. Keep the parts organized and follow the booklet through the completed build. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/tools-needed-to-build-your-ramp\"\u003eKit Assembly guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you get the tools and work area ready before you begin.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep an open route back to the transition\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart by enjoying the quarter pipe on its own before surrounding it with more features. At 68 pounds, it also deserves a thought-out place to skate and a practical route if it needs to move. A new obstacle should add something you want to practice without closing the approach. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003eTypes of Ramps guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you choose that next job when you are ready.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Brad McClain Blue Tile Quarter Pipe in the selected Skate Paint configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExterior-grade lumber and plywood parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBrad McClain Blue Tile Quarter Pipe freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit ships by scheduled curbside freight. The carrier calls with a delivery window, and two to three able-bodied adults should be ready to hand-unload and inspect the shipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly planning\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAssembly uses a drill and takes about 45 to 60 minutes. Build on a level foundation with the required tools and follow the photo instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Brad McClain Blue Tile Quarter Pipe\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Blue Tile Quarter Pipe compare with the 4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth are four feet wide, but they solve different space and transition jobs. The Blue Tile is 2 feet tall, 4 feet deep, and 68 pounds, with Brad McClain artwork and an optional one-quart paint choice. The standard 4 Foot Wide ramp is 3 feet 2 inches tall, 6 feet 5 inches deep, 175 pounds, and has rear casters. Choose the geometry and mobility the site needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Blue Tile Quarter Pipe compare with the American Flag Quarter Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth ramps are 2 feet tall and 4 feet deep. The Blue Tile is 4 feet wide, weighs 68 pounds, takes about 45 to 60 minutes to assemble, and offers one quart of Skate Paint for exposed plywood. The American Flag model is 3 feet 2 inches wide, weighs 70 pounds, takes 30 to 45 minutes, and has no separate paint choice. Choose by width, finish control, and artwork.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan the Brad McClain Blue Tile Quarter Pipe be used outdoors?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Brad McClain Blue Tile Quarter Pipe uses materials intended for outdoor use. Build it on a level foundation, keep the approach and roll-away clear, and use the optional one quart of Skate Paint only on exposed plywood. Outdoor placement does not turn GatorSkins or Skatelite Pro into options for this model, and the Blue Tile artwork should remain uncovered.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the Brad McClain Blue Tile Quarter Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Brad McClain Blue Tile Quarter Pipe for transition practice such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and launching into a line. Its height, width, and mobility determine how it fits with the rest of the setup, so start with a clear approach and progress within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Brad McClain Blue Tile Quarter Pipe if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607490576567,"sku":"Blue Tile QP","price":479.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39607490707639,"sku":"Blue Tile QP+Quart","price":558.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/ramp6.jpg?v=1729241229"},{"product_id":"bump-to-stairs","title":"Bump to Stairs Skate Obstacle","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePut stair tricks on the session list\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBump to Stairs brings a wedge approach and a grindable two-stair feature into your setup. Use it to work on stair approaches, ollies and grinds, with a twelve-inch bump and six-foot overall length to plan around. Choose the line you want to skate and give it room to run.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring a \u003cem\u003ebump and two stairs\u003c\/em\u003e into the line\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wedge bump and two-stair set give you more than one feature to work on during a session. Plan an ollie up or down the stairs, or use the bump as part of the approach. Start with the move you want to practice and leave room for its landing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose which stair gets the coping\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe galvanized metal coping can mount on either stair. That lets you choose the edge you want for grind-and-slide practice when you set up the obstacle. Consider which stair suits the trick you are working on, then follow the supplied assembly instructions for mounting it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake room for the landing, too\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ramp is six feet long and three feet two inches wide, with a twelve-inch bump. Mark that footprint first, then add the run-in and the landing area for your chosen line. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you avoid squeezing the skating into the space left over.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFollow the photos through the build\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bump to Stairs kit arrives boxed with an instruction manual and photos. Bring a drill and allow an estimated forty-five to sixty minutes for assembly. Lay out the parts where you can work through the sequence before positioning the finished setup for skating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan the finish before the first run\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wooden ramp calls for one quart of Skate Paint. Include coating the wood in your build plan, then make regular checks and care part of keeping the spot ready to skate. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e gives you a place to start beyond assembly day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne wedge bump ramp\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne two-stair set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne galvanized-metal coping piece that mounts on either stair\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor Bump to Stairs Skate Obstacle, assembly is estimated at 45-60 minutes and the tools are drill. Follow the product instructions for the exact kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Bump to Stairs Skate Obstacle\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Bump to Stairs Skate Obstacle differ from a basic Wedge Bump?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBump to Stairs carries the launch into a two-stair target with a coping choice. A Wedge Bump stays focused on the takeoff. Choose the stair version when the step feature will add meaningful practice instead of buying more complexity that the rider will avoid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eIs Bump to Stairs intended to replace a full street stair set?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a focused six-foot obstacle built around a wedge bump and two-stair section. It brings stair-style practice into a controlled setup without claiming to reproduce every street condition. Judge the product by that compact role and the route available around it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen should I compare Bump to Stairs with Bump to Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompare them when the rider wants a connected technical target after the bump. Bump to Stairs emphasizes a two-step shape and movable coping position; Bump to Rail emphasizes a raised red rail. Choose the obstacle the rider will actually use in repeated sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the Bump to Stairs Skate Obstacle?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Bump to Stairs Skate Obstacle as a line-building obstacle for launches, ollies, and other tricks that fit its exact shape. Give the feature a straight approach and clear landing or exit, then progress from basic rollovers and controlled launches within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Bump to Stairs Skate Obstacle if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps and obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490402582711,"sku":"creager","price":419.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/two_stairs.jpg?v=1729241229"},{"product_id":"bump-to-rail","title":"Bump to Rail Skate Obstacle","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOne bump and rail. A line to make your own.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring a bump-and-rail line into your home setup. Bump to Rail pairs a twelve-inch wooden bump with a seventeen-inch rail running along its edge, giving you one connected obstacle to work into a run. The kit and photo instructions help you get from the build to the session. Photos show the earlier black rail. Your kit ships with a red rail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWork on the connection between \u003cem\u003ebump and rail\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rail runs along the edge of the wooden bump and across its crest. Work on your approach and rail trick with both parts of the obstacle in the same relationship each time. It gives your home setup a line to return to, whether you are repeating a familiar trick or working toward the next one.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLeave space for the whole line\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe four-by-eight-foot footprint covers the obstacle, not the run leading into it or the roll-away beyond it. Position the feature around that complete path and how it meets the rest of the setup. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you think beyond the product's rectangle before deciding where the bump belongs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSize up the bump and rail together\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bump stands twelve inches high and the rail seventeen inches high. Picture your approach through both features when choosing this setup. If you already skate a standalone rail, the wooden takeoff adds a different part of the line to work on.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild it with a drill and photo instructions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBump to Rail arrives as a kit with a photo instruction booklet. Assembly is estimated at one to two hours using a drill. Give the pieces room to be organized before you begin so you can follow how the wooden bump and metal rail come together, rather than improvising their connection.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the wooden bump some protection\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAdd the one-quart Skate Paint option to coat the exposed plywood before the first session. The wooden bump and finished red rail have different care needs, so keep the coating on the wood. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan protection and upkeep as the obstacle becomes part of your regular setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Bump to Rail kit combining a 12-inch wooden bump and 17-inch red rail\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne quart of Skate Paint only when selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBump to Rail has an estimated one-to-two-hour assembly window and requires a drill. Build the connected bump and red rail carefully, then check their finished relationship before opening the riding lane.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Bump to Rail Skate Obstacle\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Bump to Rail Skate Obstacle compare with the Triangle Apple Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBump to Rail combines a 12-inch wooden bump with a 17-inch rail along its edge. Triangle Apple is a low, six-foot triangular obstacle with coping along the top ridge. Choose the shape that fits the lines and tricks you want to practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow should rider experience affect the Bump to Rail Skate Obstacle decision?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThink about the tricks you already have and what you want to learn next. The wooden bump is 12 inches high and the rail is 17 inches high. Compare those heights with obstacles you ride comfortably, and leave a clear approach and exit for practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eShould Bump to Rail anchor a route or connect two parts of the setup?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can serve either role depending on the surrounding space. Use it as an anchor when the connected bump and rail are the main practice feature. Use it as a connector only when the run-in and roll-away tie cleanly into other obstacles without creating crossing traffic.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the Bump to Rail Skate Obstacle?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Bump to Rail Skate Obstacle as a line-building obstacle for launches, ollies, and other tricks that fit its exact shape. Give the feature a straight approach and clear landing or exit, then progress from basic rollovers and controlled launches within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Bump to Rail Skate Obstacle if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps and obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607559913655,"sku":"BumpToRail","price":599.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39607559946423,"sku":"BumpToRail+Quart","price":678.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/thumb1.jpg?v=1729241229"},{"product_id":"cody-mcentire-s-american-bench","title":"Cody McEntire American Skate Bench","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBring bench sessions home\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCody McEntire's American Bench gives your setup a familiar street-style feature to return to. Six feet of bench at fourteen inches high make room for focused grind-and-slide sessions, while the boxed kit keeps the build to an estimated thirty to forty-five minutes with a drill.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive a \u003cem\u003esix-foot bench\u003c\/em\u003e its own session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMake the bench the feature you came out to skate. Its six-foot length gives you a defined target for repeated approaches, whether you are revisiting a familiar grind or working on the next slide.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePicture the fourteen-inch approach\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bench stands fourteen inches high. Think about the way you will get onto it and the room you want on either side of the trick. Use that height when comparing it with the ledges and rails you already enjoy skating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFind a place for the bench to stay\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe finished bench weighs 60 pounds. Choose its position around a usable run-in and roll-away so moving it is part of the plan, rather than a task before every attempt. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you account for the riding area around it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eA short build before the first session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe American Bench comes boxed for assembly. Bring a drill and allow an estimated thirty to forty-five minutes to put it together. Clear a work area for the parts, then follow the supplied build sequence before moving the finished bench into its spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose Cody McEntire's American Bench\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is Cody McEntire's American Bench design. If you follow his skating, the signature-series connection gives the obstacle a personal reason to belong in your setup alongside its bench shape and riding dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Cody McEntire American Bench\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlan 30-45 minutes with a drill\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Cody McEntire American Bench arrives boxed for assembly. Set aside a drill and about 30 to 45 minutes, keep the parts together, and check the six-foot bench on level ground before skating it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Cody McEntire American Skate Bench\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Cody McEntire American Bench differ from a standard grind box?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe American Bench has a six-foot bench shape and stands fourteen inches high. A standard Grind Box offers a simpler rectangular ledge. Choose the bench when you want that street-style shape as a dedicated feature in your setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Cody McEntire bench compare with Jordan Hoffart's Butter Bench?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth benches are six feet long and fourteen inches high. Cody McEntire's American Bench has its own graphic treatment, while Jordan Hoffart's Butter Bench offers Black\/Grey and Brown\/Tan color choices. Compare the appearance and available options, then choose the bench you want to keep skating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen would a compact Grind Box make more sense than the Cody bench?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eA compact Grind Box makes sense when you want a shorter ledge or have less room for the obstacle. Choose the American Bench when its six-foot length and bench shape fit the tricks you want to practice. Include your approach and roll-away when comparing either option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the Cody McEntire American Skate Bench?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Cody McEntire American Skate Bench for ledge skills such as 50-50 grinds, boardslides, noseslides, and ollies on or off the obstacle. Where the top and geometry support it, riders can also work on manuals and nose manuals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Cody McEntire American Skate Bench if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grind-boxes\"\u003egrind boxes and ledges\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490413723831,"sku":"Cody-Flag-Bench","price":499.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/cody-mccentire-american-bench.jpg?v=1729241229"},{"product_id":"dave-cody-quarter-8ft-wide","title":"Dave and Cody 8 Foot Quarter Pipe","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEight feet of transition to keep coming back to\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen a narrow approach feels limiting, a wider quarter pipe opens up more of the face to skate. The Dave and Cody model gives you eight feet across the transition with The Equation identity, standing three feet two inches tall. It is a substantial home ramp for riders who will use that width, with rear casters to help when the setup needs to change.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring The \u003cem\u003eEquation identity\u003c\/em\u003e to your spot\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Dave and Cody quarter pipe pairs The Equation identity with a broad eight-foot transition. Its signature character is the reason to choose it over the standard model with the same geometry, rather than expecting a different height or riding surface. Put the look you want alongside the skating you enjoy; our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you weigh the shape of the session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the coping span an approach to match\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ramp measures eight feet wide, six feet five inches deep and three feet two inches tall. That width gives you room across the face to choose your approach and work toward the coping, but only if the surrounding ground leaves it usable. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you include the run-up and roll-away before choosing the ramp's position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep plywood layers and paint separate\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe plywood riding surface and optional Skate Paint serve different purposes. Add two quarts to protect exposed wood; the coating is not a replacement for the plywood or a separate Skatelite or GatorSkins sheet. Leave the signature artwork uncovered and plan for ongoing ramp care. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how the wood and coating work as different parts of the setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSet aside a build window for the wide ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou receive pre-cut and pre-drilled boards, counted screws, required metal parts and a photo instruction booklet. Assembly calls for a drill and wrench, with an estimate of two to three hours. Lay out the parts where you have room to work through the full-width build. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/tools-needed-to-build-your-ramp\"\u003eKit Assembly guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you prepare before the first parts come together.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUse the casters with the whole route in mind\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRear caster wheels help reposition the ramp, but its 350-pound weight calls for a deliberate move. Decide where it will skate, where it will rest and how it will get between those places before assembly. Keep the route open as the setup grows. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-foundations\"\u003eSite Preparation guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you consider access and the ground beneath the ramp alongside the riding area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Dave and Cody 8-foot-wide quarter pipe in the selected Skate Paint configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExterior-grade lumber and plywood parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDave and Cody 8 Foot Quarter Pipe freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly planning\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAssembly uses a drill and wrench and takes about 2 to 3 hours. Build on a level foundation with the required tools and follow the photo instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Dave and Cody 8 Foot Quarter Pipe\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat differs between the Dave and Cody Quarter Pipe and the standard 8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth are 3 feet 2 inches tall, 8 feet wide, 6 feet 5 inches deep, and 350 pounds. Both use rear casters and an optional two-quart paint choice. The Dave and Cody version adds The Equation identity. Choose it when that signature context matters; choose the standard model when the same geometry, mobility, and surface configuration are the priority.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Dave and Cody 8 Foot Quarter Pipe compare with the Unicorn Quarter Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth use a 6-foot-5-inch depth and rear wheels, but the Dave and Cody ramp is 3 feet 2 inches tall, 8 feet wide, 350 pounds, and offers two quarts of Skate Paint. The Unicorn is 2 feet 6 inches tall, 6 feet wide, 185 pounds, and offers one quart with its engraved graphic. Choose the broader Equation transition or the smaller Unicorn identity and footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen should I choose the six-foot quarter pipe instead of the Dave and Cody eight-foot model?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth are 3 feet 2 inches tall and 6 feet 5 inches deep, with rear casters and a two-quart paint option. The six-foot model weighs 215 pounds, while Dave and Cody is eight feet wide and 350 pounds. Choose six feet when storage and approach width matter more than the extra coping span or Equation identity.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the Dave and Cody 8 Foot Quarter Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Dave and Cody 8 Foot Quarter Pipe for transition practice such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and launching into a line. Its height, width, and mobility determine how it fits with the rest of the setup, so start with a clear approach and progress within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Dave and Cody 8 Foot Quarter Pipe if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607686430903,"sku":"Q8-DC","price":1499.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2 Quarts","offer_id":39607686463671,"sku":"Q8-DC+2xQuarts","price":1657.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/007.jpg?v=1729241228"},{"product_id":"crescent-ledge-dave-bachinsky","title":"Dave Bachinsky Crescent Skate Ledge","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTake the next ledge session around a different shape\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDave Bachinsky's Crescent Ledge gives you a ten-foot curved feature instead of another straight box. Its profile changes from a nine-inch low end to a fourteen-inch high end, adding a different approach to the ledge session. Plan the line around the shape, then give it a place in your own setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFollow the \u003cem\u003ecrescent shape\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA curved ledge changes the feature you are approaching, even when the trick is familiar. The Crescent gives a setup a reason to move beyond another straight working edge. Picture the route you want to skate along its ten-foot form.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose your approach to the high and low ends\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne end is nine inches high and the other fourteen inches. That gives you two different entry heights within the same obstacle. Consider which end you want to approach and how the line will finish when you decide which way the ledge should face.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the full ten feet room to work\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ledge measures ten feet long and twelve inches wide. Mark out that footprint along with the approach and roll-away, keeping the curved profile in mind. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you turn the measurements into a usable place to skate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSet aside time to put it together\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAssembly is estimated at thirty to forty-five minutes. Give the parts a clear work area and follow the product's instructions before placing the finished ledge. That keeps the build separate from deciding how the curved feature will sit in the line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake an outdoor spot part of the plan\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Crescent is intended for outdoor use. Start with a level paved area where the whole ledge and riding route can sit, then plan regular checks and care. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you think through upkeep after the first session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Dave Bachinsky Crescent Ledge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eReserve 30-45 minutes for assembly\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Dave Bachinsky Crescent Ledge has a 30-to-45-minute assembly estimate. Build the curved ten-foot ledge on stable ground, then place it so the 14-inch high end and 9-inch low end both have a usable route.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Dave Bachinsky Crescent Skate Ledge\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Dave Bachinsky Crescent Skate Ledge differ from a straight Grind Box?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Dave Bachinsky Crescent changes height from a 9-inch low end to a 14-inch high end across a curved ten-foot profile. A straight grind box keeps one height and direction. Choose the Crescent when that changing edge is the feature the rider wants to explore.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eDoes the rider have to use the high end first?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo fixed riding direction is required. Keep a useful route at both the 9-inch and 14-inch ends, then approach the changing-height ledge from the direction that suits the session and rider comfort. The two ends create options only when neither route is blocked.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat does Dave Bachinsky's involvement mean for this product?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe designer attribution belongs to this exact Crescent Ledge and its curved, changing-height shape. It does not replace the practical fit decision. Buyers should still choose it because the ten-foot profile and two different end heights serve the intended setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the Dave Bachinsky Crescent Skate Ledge?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Dave Bachinsky Crescent Skate Ledge for ledge skills such as 50-50 grinds, boardslides, noseslides, and ollies on or off the obstacle. Where the top and geometry support it, riders can also work on manuals and nose manuals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Dave Bachinsky Crescent Skate Ledge if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grind-boxes\"\u003egrind boxes and ledges\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490422341815,"sku":"Crescent Ledge","price":489.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/crescent5.jpg?v=1729241246"},{"product_id":"greg-lutzka-s-curb-kicker","title":"Greg Lutzka Curb Kicker","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGive the curb a new approach\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGreg Lutzka's Curb Kicker brings a metal wedge to the spot you want to skate. Place it against a suitable curb or stair for a different approach, or use it as a launch ramp on its own. It arrives assembled, so choosing the position comes before choosing the first trick.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring the \u003cem\u003ecurb into the line\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the kicker against a curb or stair to give the approach a wedge. Check how it meets the edge and the surface underneath before skating, then plan the path beyond it. The aim is to make the feature you already have part of the session you want.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUse it as a standalone launch\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou can also skate the Curb Kicker as a launch or wedge ramp without placing it against a curb. Choose a clear approach and roll-away, then work it into the line as its own feature. That gives the kicker another job when the session moves away from the stairs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose a painted metal wedge\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eDesigned by Greg Lutzka, the Curb Kicker uses galvanized metal with a painted finish. It gives you a metal ramp to consider alongside wooden kickers when choosing what belongs in your spot. Inspect the contact points and riding surface as part of preparing it for each session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSkip the assembly project\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Curb Kicker arrives assembled. You can focus on choosing its position, checking the fit and clearing the riding path instead of building a ramp first. That is useful when you want to add a wedge to the setup without setting aside time for a kit build.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLeave space beyond the wedge\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kicker is thirty-three inches deep. Allow room for your approach and the run beyond it, whether you are using a curb or skating it on its own. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you check the full path before adding another feature to the spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne Greg Lutzka Curb Kicker\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eNo assembly required\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Greg Lutzka Curb Kicker arrives assembled. Place it against a suitable curb or stair, or use it as a standalone launch. Check the fit, contact points and riding path before skating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Greg Lutzka Curb Kicker\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Curb Kicker compare with Launch WR?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the Curb Kicker when you want a metal wedge for curb or stair approaches, or a standalone launch. Launch WR combines a launch with a back wall-ride face and coping. Compare the surfaces and approaches you want to skate rather than assuming the two ramps have the same job.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Curb Kicker differ from the GB Kicker?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Curb Kicker can work against a suitable curb or stair, or serve as a standalone launch. The GB Kicker is designed to connect to OC Ramps Grind Boxes, which are sold separately. Choose around the feature you want to approach: an existing curb or stair, or a compatible grind box.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen should I compare the Curb Kicker with a Wedge Bump or Bank Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompare them when choosing a ramp approach for your spot. The Curb Kicker arrives assembled and supports curb, stair and standalone wedge use. The Wedge Bump and Bank Ramp require assembly. Consider whether you want to work with an existing curb or add a ramp face to an open area, then check each product's footprint and setup requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the Greg Lutzka Curb Kicker?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Greg Lutzka Curb Kicker as a line-building obstacle for launches, ollies, and other tricks that fit its exact shape. Give the feature a straight approach and clear landing or exit, then progress from basic rollovers and controlled launches within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Greg Lutzka Curb Kicker if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps and obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490423718071,"sku":"lutzka","price":179.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/CurbKicker6.jpg?v=1729241246"},{"product_id":"greg-lutzka-s-brick-box","title":"Greg Lutzka Brick Grind Box","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBring the brick-ledge look into your line\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGreg Lutzka's Brick Box combines outer brick paneling with a galvanized-metal construction for a street-style feature you can put in your setup. The six-foot ledge stands twelve inches high, giving you a defined edge to return to for grinds and slides.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose the \u003cem\u003ebrick-panel look\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eDesigned by Greg Lutzka, the Brick Box uses galvanized metal with outer brick paneling. It brings the look of a brick feature to a purpose-built skate obstacle. Choose it when that street-style character is part of the spot you want to create.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWork along six feet of ledge\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Brick Box gives you a six-foot length for grind-and-slide practice. Use the edge as the focus of a session or work it into a line with another obstacle. Leave enough room to approach the trick and roll away beyond the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose one coping edge or two\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose one coping edge when the box will have one main skating side. Add the second when you want to approach both sides and can keep those routes open. Make the choice around where the box will sit and how you want to use it during a session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFit a sixteen-inch-deep box into the spot\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe box is sixteen inches deep, so mark that depth together with its six-foot length before choosing a position. Keep the approach and exit clear of the next obstacle. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan where the feature goes and where the skating continues.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdd the ledge without a kit build\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Brick Box arrives with no assembly needed. Work out its route into the skating area and choose its position before delivery. That lets you spend your preparation on the layout instead of putting the box together.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne Greg Lutzka Brick Box in the selected coping configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eArrives assembled\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Greg Lutzka Brick Box needs no assembly. Choose a level location for the six-foot box, preserve an open route along the selected coping edge or edges, and place the finished obstacle before the session begins.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Greg Lutzka Brick Grind Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow should I choose between one coping edge and two?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose one coping edge when the ledge will have a primary working side. Choose two when the placement can keep both long sides open and riders will use that access. The second edge adds value only when the surrounding route makes it usable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Brick Box differ from a standard Grind Box?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Greg Lutzka Brick Box combines a brick-style signature form with a selectable coping-edge count. A standard Grind Box offers a simpler low ledge in several lengths. Choose the Brick Box when its design and edge choice add value beyond the basic rectangular format.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen should I compare the Brick Box with a skate bench?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompare them when choosing the shape and edge you want for grind-and-slide sessions. The Brick Box gives you a twelve-inch-high ledge with one or two coping edges. A skate bench brings a different form to the spot. Compare the particular bench's height, working edges and footprint with the line you want to skate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the Greg Lutzka Brick Grind Box?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Greg Lutzka Brick Grind Box for ledge skills such as 50-50 grinds, boardslides, noseslides, and ollies on or off the obstacle. Where the top and geometry support it, riders can also work on manuals and nose manuals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Greg Lutzka Brick Grind Box if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grind-boxes\"\u003egrind boxes and ledges\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"1 coping edge","offer_id":39607609360567,"sku":"BrickBox","price":539.1,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false},{"title":"2 coping edge","offer_id":39607609393335,"sku":"BrickBox_2_copings","price":565.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/brick-box2.jpg?v=1729241246"},{"product_id":"jordan-hoffart-s-butter-bench","title":"Jordan Hoffart Butter Skate Bench","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eYour next session, on Jordan Hoffart's Butter Bench\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring a bench feature into the home setup with Jordan Hoffart's six-foot Butter Bench. The fourteen-inch height gives the next grind or slide a clear target, and two color combinations let you choose its look. It arrives as a kit with photo instructions to guide the build.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake time for \u003cem\u003ebench tricks\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA six-foot bench gives you one feature to keep coming back to as you work on a grind or slide. Use the Butter Bench as the focus of a small session or place it in a longer line with the ramps and obstacles you already skate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWork with a fourteen-inch height\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Butter Bench stands fourteen inches high in either color. Compare that height with a ledge you already skate, then picture the approach you want to practice. The color choice changes the look; the height and length stay the same.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePick Black\/Grey or Brown\/Tan\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose Black\/Grey for one look or Brown\/Tan for the other. Both are versions of Jordan Hoffart's Butter Bench, so you can choose the color combination you want in the spot while keeping the same bench form.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild it with photos to follow\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bench arrives in kit form with photo instructions. Assembly is estimated at thirty to forty-five minutes using a drill. Lay out the parts before starting so you can follow the sequence and see the bench take shape as you go.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive a sixty-nine-pound bench a useful home\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAt 69 pounds, the Butter Bench deserves a placement you want to keep using. Plan the carrying route and a clear approach and exit around the finished obstacle. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you make room for the session as well as the bench.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Jordan Hoffart Butter Bench in the selected color\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlan 30-45 minutes with a drill\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Jordan Hoffart Butter Bench arrives as a kit and needs a drill plus about 30 to 45 minutes of assembly. Build it on stable ground, then check the six-foot bench before skating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Jordan Hoffart Butter Skate Bench\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Jordan Hoffart Butter Skate Bench compare with the Skateboard Picnic Bench?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Butter Bench gives you a single bench-style feature, while the Picnic Bench has a table-and-seat shape. Think about which shape adds something different to your spot and the ways you want to approach it, rather than choosing by the product name alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Jordan Hoffart bench compare with the Cody McEntire bench?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth benches are six feet long and fourteen inches high. The Butter Bench offers Black\/Grey and Brown\/Tan color choices; Cody McEntire's American Bench has a different graphic treatment. Compare their appearance and handling needs alongside the space you have for skating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen is a basic Grind Box a better choice than the Butter Bench?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose a Grind Box when you prefer a basic rectangular ledge or want to compare different box lengths. Choose the Butter Bench when a six-foot bench shape is the feature you want in your spot. Measure the obstacle and the room to approach and roll away before deciding.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the Jordan Hoffart Butter Skate Bench?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Jordan Hoffart Butter Skate Bench for ledge skills such as 50-50 grinds, boardslides, noseslides, and ollies on or off the obstacle. Where the top and geometry support it, riders can also work on manuals and nose manuals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Jordan Hoffart Butter Skate Bench if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grind-boxes\"\u003egrind boxes and ledges\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Black\/Grey","offer_id":39607690395831,"sku":"JHbutterbench_blackgrey","price":439.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown\/Tan","offer_id":39607690428599,"sku":"JHbutterbench_brown_tan","price":439.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/hoff_bench-1.jpg?v=1729241248"},{"product_id":"huf-shoe-box-skate-ledge","title":"HUF Shoe Box Skate Ledge","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA HUF shoe box you can skate\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring the HUF x OC Ramps Shoe Box into your spot for a ledge with a recognizable skate-shop look. Coping along both eight-foot sides gives you two edges for grind-and-slide sessions, with a fifteen-and-a-half-inch height to work into the line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake the \u003cem\u003eHUF shoe-box design\u003c\/em\u003e part of the spot\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe HUF collaboration turns a shoe box into a full-size skate ledge. Choose it when you want the obstacle's look to contribute to the setup as much as the tricks you skate on it. It brings a familiar piece of skate culture into a feature you can return to every session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep both long edges in play\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eCoping runs along both eight-foot sides. Give each side enough room for an approach and roll-away so you can switch the edge you are skating during the session. A 50-50 or slide can be the focus of the run without leaving half the box against a wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePicture the approach at fifteen and a half inches\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ledge stands 15.5 inches high. Compare it with the curbs or boxes you already skate, then think about the trick you want to bring to this edge. The height helps you choose the target; the HUF design gives that target its character.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the box a full riding area\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Shoe Box measures eight feet long and four feet wide. Include the paths into and away from each usable edge when you mark its position. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you check the space for the session as well as the rectangle occupied by the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan access for a finished ledge\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe HUF Shoe Box requires no assembly. Plan the route into its final position with the full eight-foot length and four-foot width in mind, including any gates or narrow turns. You can skip a kit build, but the complete obstacle still needs a clear path into the spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne HUF Shoe Box Skate Ledge\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eArrives ready to skate\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe HUF Shoe Box Skate Ledge arrives without an assembly step. Reserve level space for the four-by-eight-foot obstacle and keep both long coping sides open before moving it into position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about HUF Shoe Box Skate Ledge\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the HUF Shoe Box compare with the éS Shoe Box Ledge?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth measure 15.5 inches high, four feet wide and eight feet long, with coping along both long sides. Choose between the HUF and éS collaboration designs based on the look you want in your setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhy choose the HUF Shoe Box instead of a plain grind box?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe HUF collaboration brings an oversized shoe-box design to a ledge for grinds and slides. Choose it when that design is part of what you want in the spot, then compare the footprint and skating edges with the other box you are considering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen is a one-edge ledge a better fit than the HUF Shoe Box?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eConsider a one-edge ledge if your layout gives you only one useful approach. The HUF Shoe Box offers coping on both long sides, so leaving access to both lets you use both edges. Compare each candidate's actual footprint with the riding space you have.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the HUF Shoe Box Skate Ledge?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the HUF Shoe Box Skate Ledge for ledge skills such as 50-50 grinds, boardslides, noseslides, and ollies on or off the obstacle. Where the top and geometry support it, riders can also work on manuals and nose manuals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the HUF Shoe Box Skate Ledge if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grind-boxes\"\u003egrind boxes and ledges\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490441085111,"sku":"HufBox","price":789.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/huf-box.jpg?v=1729241247"},{"product_id":"jordan-hoffart-s-speed-bump","title":"Jordan Hoffart Speed Bump Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAdd a bump to the next run\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eJordan Hoffart's Speed Bump gives a home setup a fourteen-inch-high feature to work into the line. Its four-foot width and eight-foot length create a different choice from a small kicker. Build the kit with the photo instructions, then make room to approach it and roll away into the rest of the session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePut a \u003cem\u003ebump in the line\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Speed Bump gives a run a raised feature to approach instead of leaving the space flat. Choose it when you want a bump to work around and over as part of the session, with the rest of the line planned around how you intend to skate it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUse four feet of width\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bump is four feet wide. That gives you room across its face to position your approach, while the fourteen-inch height defines the scale of the feature. Think about the route you enjoy skating rather than choosing the obstacle by height alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan the eight-foot body and the run beyond it\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEight feet of ramp length needs a deliberate place in the setup. Add the approach and roll-away to that footprint, then account for carrying a 67-pound obstacle into position. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan the whole riding route.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrom boxed kit to finished bump\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Speed Bump comes as a kit with photo instructions. Bring a drill and allow an estimated thirty to forty-five minutes for assembly. Organize the pieces first, then follow the sequence so the completed ramp is ready for its place in the setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose protection for the wood\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAdd the one-quart Skate Paint option when you want a coating for the exposed plywood. Keep the coating and its application in the build plan before skating. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you prepare for maintenance as the bump becomes a regular part of your spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Jordan Hoffart Speed Bump Ramp kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne quart of Skate Paint only when selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor Jordan Hoffart Speed Bump Ramp, assembly is estimated at 30-45 minutes and the tools are drill. Follow the product instructions for the exact kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Jordan Hoffart Speed Bump Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Jordan Hoffart Speed Bump differ from the compact Wedge Bump?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Speed Bump is a broader eight-foot obstacle standing 14 inches high and four feet wide. The Wedge Bump is a four-foot connector standing 12 inches high. Choose the Speed Bump when a larger signature transition is the desired feature, not simply a small launch.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Speed Bump compare with the Bank Skateboard Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Speed Bump is a lower, two-sided-style bump that can sit within a route, while the Bank is a much larger inclined face intended as a substantial feature. Choose the Speed Bump for flow through the setup and the Bank when a broad face should anchor it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWho should consider the Speed Bump instead of a two-sided spine?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the Speed Bump for a broad bump profile approached as one continuous feature. Choose a Micro Spine or Quarter Pipe Spine when two transition faces and direction changes are the main job. The products may occupy similar planning conversations, but they create different riding shapes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the Jordan Hoffart Speed Bump Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Jordan Hoffart Speed Bump Ramp as a line-building obstacle for launches, ollies, and other tricks that fit its exact shape. Give the feature a straight approach and clear landing or exit, then progress from basic rollovers and controlled launches within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Jordan Hoffart Speed Bump Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps and obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607699046583,"sku":"SpeedBump","price":379.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39607699079351,"sku":"SpeedBump+Quart","price":458.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/speed_bump22-1.jpg?v=1729241246"},{"product_id":"double-step-ledge","title":"Double Step Skate Ledge","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTwo steps. More than one way into the session.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Double Step Ledge puts a low and a higher target in the same six-foot obstacle. Work with the six-and-a-half-inch step or the twelve-inch step as you choose the approach for your next trick. The kit includes photo instructions, with an optional wood coating to add before it takes its place in the setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose between \u003cem\u003etwo ledge heights\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe first step is six and a half inches high; the second is twelve inches. Both belong to one obstacle, so you can move between the lower and higher targets during a session. Choose the step that suits the trick you want to work on next.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep six feet of length in the line\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth steps are part of a six-foot-long ledge. That gives the feature an extended shape to work alongside as you plan approaches and exits. Think about where the next trick will begin and finish rather than placing it only where the rectangle fits.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake room beside the steps\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe complete obstacle is two and a half feet wide. Leave room to approach the step you want and roll away without another feature blocking the path. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you map that surrounding area as well as the ledge's footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild both steps from one kit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Double Step arrives boxed with detailed photo instructions. Assembly is estimated at thirty to forty-five minutes using a drill. Lay out the parts before you start and follow the sequence as both ledge heights come together.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdd a coating for the exposed wood\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA one-quart Skate Paint option is available with the ledge. Use it to coat the exposed plywood, then include regular checks and care in your plans for the setup. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you look after the wooden obstacle beyond the first session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Double Step Skate Ledge kit with 6.5-inch and 12-inch step heights\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne quart of Skate Paint only when selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBuild the two steps with a drill\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Double Step Ledge needs a drill and about 30 to 45 minutes of assembly. Keep the 6.5-inch and 12-inch step sections organized, then check that the completed six-foot ledge rests level.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Double Step Skate Ledge\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Double Step Ledge differ from stacking two separate boxes?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eIts 6.5-inch and 12-inch steps are connected in one six-foot obstacle, so the relationship between the two levels stays consistent. Separate boxes offer more rearrangement. Choose the Double Step when two fixed heights in one compact ledge are more valuable than modular placement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWho should compare the Double Step with the Crescent Ledge?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth provide more than one working height, but they do it differently. The Double Step creates two defined levels; the Crescent moves between a 9-inch low end and 14-inch high end along a curve. Compare the kind of edge the rider wants, not just length.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Double Step Skate Ledge compare with the Skateboard Manny Pad?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Double Step gives you two fixed ledge heights in one obstacle. A manual pad provides a low platform for balance tricks. Choose the Double Step when you want two heights for grinds and slides; compare a manual pad when manuals and nose manuals are the main focus.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the Double Step Skate Ledge?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Double Step Skate Ledge for ledge skills such as 50-50 grinds, boardslides, noseslides, and ollies on or off the obstacle. Where the top and geometry support it, riders can also work on manuals and nose manuals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Double Step Skate Ledge if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grind-boxes\"\u003egrind boxes and ledges\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607618011319,"sku":"DoubleStepLedge","price":499.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false},{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39607618044087,"sku":"DoubleStepLedge+Quart","price":578.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/double-step2.jpg?v=1729241247"},{"product_id":"ryan-decenzo-s-24k-gold-rail","title":"Ryan Decenzo 24k Gold Skate Rail","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAn eight-foot rail that can come along for the session\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTake a full-length flat rail to the next spot. Ryan Decenzo's 24K Gold Rail separates into two four-foot pieces for travel, then reconnects for eight-foot grind-and-slide sessions. Adjustable height lets you change the setup, while the gold-colored finish brings the signature look.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep \u003cem\u003eeight feet of rail\u003c\/em\u003e in the session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEight feet of flat rail gives you space to work on boardslides, 50-50s and the next grind or slide you want to link. The flat top is the defining skating choice here. Bring it into a rail-focused session or make it the grind feature in a line with your other obstacles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose a working height from twelve to seventeen inches\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAdjust the rail from twelve to seventeen inches to suit the approach you want to practice. You can return to a familiar setting or try another height within the same rail's range. Consider the takeoff and roll-away as you place it among the rest of the setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePack two shorter sections for the move\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe eight-foot rail separates into two four-foot pieces for travel and storage. That gives you shorter sections to fit in a vehicle or put away after a session. Reconnect them at the next spot to skate the full eight-foot rail again.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGet the rail together in a few minutes\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAssembly is estimated at three to five minutes, making the build a short part of a rail session. Join the two sections, choose the height and check the assembled rail before skating. When it is time to leave, the same split design lets you break it down for the trip home.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the full rail a clear line\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe complete rail weighs 52 pounds, so think through the carry as well as its place in the session. Set it on level pavement with a straight approach and room to roll away. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan that riding route around the eight-foot assembled rail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne Ryan Decenzo 24K Gold Rail\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eThree to five minutes for rail setup\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Ryan Decenzo 24K Gold Rail takes about three to five minutes to assemble. Join the two four-foot sections into the full eight-foot rail, choose a height from 12 to 17 inches, and check the connection before riding.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Ryan Decenzo 24K Gold Skate Rail\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan the two four-foot sections of the Ryan Decenzo 24K Gold Rail be ridden as separate rails?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The eight-foot rail separates into two four-foot pieces for travel and storage, but those pieces are not presented as two independent riding configurations. Assemble and secure the complete rail for use; the travel joint is not proof that either half is a standalone rail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does this rail compare with the Green Monster Flat Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth are adjustable flat rails, but Ryan Decenzo's rail adjusts from 12 to 17 inches and splits into two four-foot pieces. Green Monster adjusts from 11 to 14 inches and is lighter. Compare desired height range, travel routine, and visual finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 24K Gold Rail compare with the Glow in the Dark Round Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eRyan Decenzo's rail uses a flat profile, reaches a higher adjustment range, and separates for travel. The Glow rail uses a round profile and is lighter. Compare the working surface and handling routine first, then let the distinctive finish break a close tie.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the Ryan Decenzo 24K Gold Skate Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Ryan Decenzo 24K Gold Skate Rail for rail tricks such as boardslides and 50-50 grinds, then progress to more technical slides and grinds as control improves. Keep a straight, clear approach and exit that match the rail's height and length.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Ryan Decenzo 24K Gold Skate Rail if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skate-rails\"\u003eskate rails\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490451734711,"sku":"24kGoldRail","price":349.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/decenzo_rail1.jpg?v=1729241246"},{"product_id":"picnic-bench","title":"Skateboard Picnic Bench","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBring a bench spot into your setup\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWork on grinds and slides along the Picnic Bench's Butter edges, or take a manual across its flat top. The six-foot bench brings a familiar street obstacle to your skate spot and arrives as a kit to build with a drill.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLine up along the \u003cem\u003eButter edges\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eButter edges run along both long sides of the bench. Choose the side that suits your approach, then work on the grind or slide you want to take down the line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUse the flat top for another trick\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe flat surface between the edges gives you a place to work on manuals and nose manuals. Link an ollie onto the bench with the balance trick and roll-away when that fits the line you want to skate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan for a six-foot bench\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bench measures six feet long, twenty-two inches wide and fourteen inches high. Mark out that footprint before choosing its place, then leave additional room for the approach and roll-away at either end.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild the bench with a drill\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Picnic Bench arrives in kit form with photo instructions. You need a drill for assembly, with an estimated build time of forty-five minutes before you place it in the setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose the shape your spot is missing\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe trestle-style supports and broad top give this obstacle a bench form. Choose it when you want that street-furniture shape in the line, or browse \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/collections\/grind-boxes\"\u003egrind boxes and ledges\u003c\/a\u003e to compare it with a box or stepped obstacle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Picnic Bench kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto assembly instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Skateboard Picnic Bench\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can I work on with the Picnic Bench?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eTry 50-50 grinds, boardslides or noseslides along a Butter edge. The flat top also gives you a target for manuals and nose manuals; choose the approach and exit around the trick you are working on.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Picnic Bench compare with a standalone skate rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bench has a broad, flat top between its Butter edges, giving you a platform as well as long edges to skate. A standalone rail offers a narrower grind or slide target. Choose around the obstacle shape and tricks you want in your setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eIs a six-foot space enough for the Picnic Bench?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eSix feet is the bench length, not the full skating area. You also need room to approach, get onto the obstacle and roll away. Mark out the bench footprint and your intended line before deciding where it will go.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eDoes the Picnic Bench come ready to skate?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt arrives as a kit, not a preassembled bench. Follow the photo instructions, assemble the kit and check the finished setup before skating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Skateboard Picnic Bench if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490452357303,"sku":"TJ_Bench","price":459.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/TJPicnicBench.jpg?v=1659658721"},{"product_id":"grl-combo","title":"GRL Combo Skate Obstacle","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOne combo, more ways to skate\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe GRL Combo brings a grind box, rail and launch ramp together in one obstacle. Choose a rail trick, work on the box or take the launch into your next line. The six-foot grind box gives the combination a street-style focus with more than one way to spend the session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWork the \u003cem\u003erail for grind sessions\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the rail as your target for a grind or slide, with the rest of the combo giving you other features to return to. Plan the approach and exit around the rail trick you want to practice so the whole obstacle has a useful place in your spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the six-foot box its own session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe grind box is six feet long, giving you a separate target for box grinds and slides within the same combo. Choose the edge and approach for the trick you want to revisit, then leave space to roll away. You can change the focus of the session without changing obstacles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring the launch into the run\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe launch ramp adds a ramp approach to the combo's grind features. Work it into the route you want to skate, with clear space for the run-in and landing. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan around every side you intend to use, not just the box's length.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild the combo before choosing the first trick\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe GRL Combo has an estimated thirty-minute assembly time. Set aside that build time before the first session, then check where the finished obstacle will sit and how you will approach its different features. The assembled combo weighs 45 pounds, which also belongs in your placement plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLook after the wood between sessions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePlan for one quart of Skate Paint to coat the wooden parts of the combo. Keep that work in the setup plan, then check and care for the wood as you use the obstacle. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you make maintenance part of keeping the spot ready for the next run.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 6-foot grind box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne orange skate rail\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne launch ramp\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired kit hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne quart of Skate Paint only when selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBoxed kit delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit arrives packaged for assembly. Keep the components together, inspect the shipment when it arrives, and report any visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly and setup\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep the grind box, orange skate rail, launch ramp, and kit hardware organized while unpacking, then plan about 30 minutes for assembly on a level foundation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about GRL Ramp, Rail and Grind Box Combo\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can I practice on the GRL Combo?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the grind box for 50-50s, slides, and manuals; the skate rail for boardslides and rail grinds; and the launch ramp for ollies, flip tricks, and grabs. The GRL Combo supports several kinds of sessions in one product, so riders can focus on one feature at a time or link compatible tricks into a line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat comes with the GRL Combo?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe GRL Combo includes one 6-foot grind box, one orange skate rail, one launch ramp, and the required kit hardware. Those three skating features are sold together as one combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eShould I add Skate Paint to the GRL Combo?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eAdd the one-quart Skate Paint option when you want protection for the exposed plywood. GatorSkins and Skatelite Pro are not available for this product, so Skate Paint is the surface-protection upgrade offered for the GRL Combo.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow long does the GRL Combo take to assemble?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003ePlan about 30 minutes for assembly. Keep the grind box, rail, launch ramp, and required hardware together while unpacking, use the current assembly guidance for this exact kit, and assemble the combo on a level work area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the GRL Ramp, Rail and Grind Box Combo if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003eExplore Skate Ramps and Obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607819567287,"sku":"GRL_combo","price":599.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39607819600055,"sku":"GRL_combo_1Quart","price":678.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/grindbox4-1.jpg?v=1729241247"},{"product_id":"green-monster-skate-rail-6ft-flat","title":"Green Monster 6 Foot Flat Skate Rail","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMake room for flat-rail sessions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGreen Monster gives boardslides and grinds a dedicated flat bar you can move between sessions. Adjust it from eleven to fourteen inches, then take it apart when it is time to put it away or head to another spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose a \u003cem\u003eflat bar\u003c\/em\u003e for the tricks you want\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eGreen Monster puts a flat working surface under boardslides, 50-50s and other rail tricks. Choose it when you want to spend more time on flat-bar practice, either as the main feature at a small spot or as the rail in a longer line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdjust between eleven and fourteen inches\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rail adjusts from eleven to fourteen inches. Set it at a height you want to work on, then change the setting when the session calls for a different approach. One adjustable rail gives you that range without replacing the obstacle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTake it apart when the spot changes\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eGreen Monster is designed to come apart for moving. That can matter when the rail needs to leave the skating area after a session or travel to another location. Plan a storage place for the parts as well as a usable spot for the assembled rail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eConsider the carry as well as the base\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAt 25 pounds, Green Monster is an obstacle you can plan to move when the layout changes. Its 19-inch-wide base gives you a starting point for positioning the supports. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you add the approach, exit and access around the rail to the plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTurn clear pavement into a rail spot\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eGreen Monster is intended for outdoor use, so a suitable paved area can become a place to work on rail tricks. Choose a level position with a straight approach and an open roll-away. Check the assembled rail each time you relocate it, then keep that route clear for the session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne Green Monster 6ft Flat Skate Rail\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eTake it apart when the spot changes\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGreen Monster is made to move and take apart. Reassemble it at the chosen height from 11 to 14 inches, then settle the 25-pound rail on level pavement with a clear approach and exit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Green Monster 6 Foot Flat Skate Rail\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eDoes the Green Monster have a round-rail or fixed-height configuration?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Green Monster is the flat-profile model and its verified height range adjusts from 11 to 14 inches. Buyers who want a round contact surface should compare the Glow rail, while someone who wants a fixed height should choose a different rail rather than expecting this selector-free product to change profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Green Monster 6 Foot Flat Skate Rail compare with the Glow in the Dark Round Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eGreen Monster has a flat working profile and adjusts from 11 to 14 inches. The Glow rail is round and adjusts from 10.5 to 13.5 inches. Choose the top profile the rider wants first, then use the smaller height difference as a secondary factor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does Green Monster compare with Ryan Decenzo's 24K Gold Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth are adjustable flat rails, but Green Monster is lighter and uses a lower adjustment range, while the Ryan Decenzo rail reaches higher and splits into two four-foot sections. Compare working height, handling routine, and visual identity before choosing between them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the Green Monster 6 Foot Flat Skate Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Green Monster 6 Foot Flat Skate Rail for rail tricks such as boardslides and 50-50 grinds, then progress to more technical slides and grinds as control improves. Keep a straight, clear approach and exit that match the rail's height and length.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Green Monster 6 Foot Flat Skate Rail if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skate-rails\"\u003eskate rails\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490512552119,"sku":"GrnMonster","price":249.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/Green6ftFlatRail1.jpg?v=1729241248"},{"product_id":"glow-in-dark-8ft-round-rail","title":"Glow in the Dark 8 Foot Round Skate Rail","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA round rail with a look of its own\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA round bar for your next boardslide, with a glow finish that gives the spot a look of its own. The Glow in the Dark Rail adjusts in height and measures 92 inches long. Make it the focus of a rail session or work it into a line with the obstacles you already skate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePut a \u003cem\u003eround bar\u003c\/em\u003e into your rail practice\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA round profile gives your boardslides and grinds a curved contact surface to work across. It is a useful addition when you want round-rail practice alongside a flat bar or ledge. Start with familiar tricks on this shape, then build the session around what you want to try next.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSet the height for your next approach\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose a height from ten and a half to thirteen and a half inches. That adjustment lets you revisit a setting you enjoy or change the approach for another session. Place the rail where you have room to set up the trick and roll away afterward.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan from the measured rail size\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rail measures 92 inches long and has a 19.5-inch-wide base. Mark out that footprint where you want it to sit, then leave space for the approach and roll-away. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you turn those measurements into a usable riding route.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring the glow into the look of the spot\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe glow treatment comes with this rail, giving the round bar a visual character beyond a standard metal finish. It can be part of what you enjoy about the setup and its photos. For evening sessions, keep the approach and roll-away well lit so you can see the whole line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan how the rail moves between sessions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThink about where this rail will live between sessions. It weighs 30 pounds and measures 92 inches long, so allow for the full length along the carrying route and in storage. A place close to the skating area can make bringing it out and putting it away more convenient.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne Glow in the Dark 8ft Round Rail\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSet the adjustable rail on level pavement\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose a height from 10.5 to 13.5 inches, then settle the 30-pound rail on level pavement. Its 92-inch overall length needs a straight route that stays clear of crossing traffic.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Glow in the Dark 8 Foot Round Skate Rail\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow should storage affect the choice between the Glow Rail and Green Monster?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Glow in the Dark Round Rail measures 92 inches overall and weighs 30 pounds. Green Monster weighs 25 pounds and is made to come apart for moving. Choose the round or flat working profile you want to skate, then consider the space and handling each rail needs between sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Glow in the Dark 8 Foot Round Skate Rail compare with a flat rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eIts round working profile creates a narrower curved contact surface, while a flat rail provides a broader top. Choose the shape the rider wants to practice before considering the glow finish. The 8 Foot model measures 92 inches overall, so plan the site from that physical length.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen is the glow finish worth prioritizing?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003ePrioritize it when the rider already wants this round adjustable rail and the visual treatment adds value to the spot, photos, or evening atmosphere. Do not let the finish override the practical comparison of profile, height range, length, weight, and available riding route.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the Glow in the Dark 8 Foot Round Skate Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Glow in the Dark 8 Foot Round Skate Rail for rail tricks such as boardslides and 50-50 grinds, then progress to more technical slides and grinds as control improves. Keep a straight, clear approach and exit that match the rail's height and length.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Glow in the Dark 8 Foot Round Skate Rail if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skate-rails\"\u003eskate rails\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490513240247,"sku":"8_glow_dark","price":299.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/8ftGlowDarkRail1.jpg?v=1729241247"},{"product_id":"roll-on-flat-rail","title":"Roll On Flat Rail","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTake the roll-on route to rail balance\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWant to work on rail balance without ollieing onto the bar first? The Roll-On Flat Rail gives you an angled entry leading into a flat metal bar. Build your approach around that entry, then work on staying centered along the rail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStart with the angled entry\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rising end leads into the flat section, giving this rail a different approach from a bar with two raised ends. Line up with the entry and leave a clear route beyond the rail. You still need to control your approach and balance; the shape does not remove the challenge.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the rail its own line\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMake the rail the focus of a session or place it alongside other obstacles. Keep its approach and exit clear rather than squeezing it into a space that only fits the metalwork. Think about the whole line you want to skate, not just where the rail will stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild the rail before the session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rail is supplied in components with assembly hardware. Assemble and check it before use. Keep the supplied fasteners together while unpacking so the pieces are ready when you begin.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRoll-On Flat Rail components\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAssembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow is this different from a standard flat rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eIts angled entry gives you a roll-on approach to the flat bar, rather than requiring an ollie onto a raised end. Choose it when that entry is the part of the session you want to work on.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eDo I need space beyond the rail itself?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Allow for your approach, the line along the rail and a clear exit. Measure the complete setup area before placing neighboring obstacles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eDoes it arrive assembled?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rail comes in components with assembly hardware. Put it together and check the assembled setup before skating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eIs the rail currently available?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the availability shown in the buy box for the current stock status. An older restock date is not a guarantee that the rail is ready to ship.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skate-rails\"\u003eBrowse more skate rails\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490513797303,"sku":"Roll_On_Rail","price":299.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/YellowRollOnRail4.jpg?v=1729241247"},{"product_id":"quarter-pipe-ramp-3-foot-wide","title":"3 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA little transition. A lot to come back for.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA quick session after work. A kickturn you want to get comfortable with. A small ramp can give you plenty of reasons to pick up your board. The 3 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe brings a two-foot-high transition to a home setup, with plywood or Skatelite surface options and photo instructions to help you put the kit together.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake the most of a \u003cem\u003esmaller skate space\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou do not need a full half pipe to enjoy skating transition at home. This quarter pipe gives you one curved ramp to ride up and return from, whether you are working on kickturns or adding transition to a setup you already enjoy. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how a quarter pipe changes a session compared with a bank or a half pipe.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMeasure the approach, not just the ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ramp stands two feet tall, with an overall width of three feet two inches and a four-foot depth. That compact footprint is only part of the plan: leave clear space to approach the transition and roll away again. Use our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e to map the skating area before deciding where it will go.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose your surface. Protect the wood.\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep the plywood riding surface or choose the optional Skatelite surface. Skate Paint is a separate protective coating for exposed plywood, not another sheet of riding material. If you choose Skatelite, the wood elsewhere on the ramp still needs appropriate care; do not apply Skate Paint over Skatelite. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you understand the difference before you choose.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eEnjoy the build without designing from scratch\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOC Ramps provides the ramp kit, assembly hardware and instructions with photos, so you can focus on putting your quarter pipe together rather than working out a ramp design on your own. A drill is required for assembly. If you are weighing a kit against starting from plans, our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-kit-vs-diy\"\u003eDIY, Kit or Custom guide\u003c\/a\u003e walks through what each route asks of you.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStart with the sessions you want to have\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA quarter pipe can be the first feature in your home setup or the transition missing from your current one. Think about how you will skate between obstacles before adding more. If your plans call for a different size or a connected park layout, explore \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eOC Ramps custom builds\u003c\/a\u003e for help turning that idea into a project.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 3-foot-wide quarter pipe ramp in the selected surface and Skate Paint configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExterior-grade lumber and plywood parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBoxed kit delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit arrives packaged for assembly. Keep the components together, inspect the shipment when it arrives, and report any visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly planning\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAssembly uses a drill and takes about 30 to 45 minutes. Build on a level foundation with the required tools and follow the photo instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 3 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen should I choose one 3 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe instead of the pair?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose this single ramp when one compact transition gives the space the turn, coping, or launch feature it needs. The Pair of 3 Foot Quarter Pipes provides two complete transitions that can face each other, sit side by side, or serve separate approaches. Buy the pair only when the site can preserve a clear route to both ramps.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 3 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe compare with the Jack-O Quarter Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth are 2 feet tall, 3 feet 2 inches wide, and 4 feet deep. The standard 3 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe weighs about 68 to 70 pounds and offers plywood or Skatelite with optional paint for exposed wood. The 70-pound Jack-O keeps its fixed seasonal graphic and has no separate Skate Paint choice. Choose surface flexibility or the graphic treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does this model compare with the 4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis ramp is two feet tall, 3 feet 2 inches wide, and four feet deep. The four-foot model is taller and deeper as well as wider. Choose by the complete geometry and usable approach, not by one foot of nominal width alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the 3 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the 3 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp for transition practice such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and launching into a line. Its height, width, and mobility determine how it fits with the rest of the setup, so start with a clear approach and progress within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 3 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None \/ Plywood","offer_id":44072604762351,"sku":"Q3","price":389.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"None \/ Skatelite","offer_id":45281830699247,"sku":"Q3+Skatelite","price":539.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart \/ Plywood","offer_id":44072604795119,"sku":"Q3+QSP","price":468.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart \/ Skatelite","offer_id":45281830732015,"sku":"Q3+QSP+Skatelite","price":618.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/quart-3-wide-1.jpg?v=1729241247"},{"product_id":"quarter-pipe-ramp-4-ft-wide","title":"4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBring a taller transition into your home sessions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen you want more height than the two-foot quarter pipe but still need to watch the width of your setup, this four-foot-wide model gives you another way to build your session. Its three-foot-two-inch height brings more transition to skate, while the kit and photo instructions let you take on assembly with a defined plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose \u003cem\u003eheight and width\u003c\/em\u003e separately\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFour feet describes the width, not the height. This quarter pipe stands three feet two inches tall, so it is both wider and taller than the compact three-foot-wide model. Choose it for the transition you want to skate, not just the space left against a wall. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e can help you think through that choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive your approach room to work\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ramp extends six feet five inches from front to back before you add the open space needed to skate it. Picture the run toward the ramp and the way back out, including the other uses of your garage or yard. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps turn those ideas into measurements you can actually check.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake wood protection part of the setup\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe optional Skate Paint adds protection for exposed plywood. It is a coating applied to the wood, not a separate riding-surface sheet or another plywood layer. If your ramp will live outdoors, plan for protection and ongoing care from the start rather than waiting for the wood to show wear. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains what to keep an eye on.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild a ramp instead of starting a design project\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit includes the materials, assembly hardware and photo instructions for putting your quarter pipe together. Have a drill and wrench ready, and make room to lay out the parts. If you would rather discuss help with the build, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/installations\"\u003eOC Ramps installation services\u003c\/a\u003e offer a separate route to getting your setup assembled.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild your next session around transition\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA quarter pipe gives you a place to work on turning back down the ramp, then explore coping tricks as your skating develops. It can also bring a different challenge to a space already used for flatground or a rail. For a permanent layout built around several features, talk with OC Ramps about \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003ea custom skatepark\u003c\/a\u003e rather than trying to make a standard kit fit every idea.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 4-foot-wide quarter pipe kit in the selected Skate Paint configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExterior-grade lumber and plywood parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003e4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly planning\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAssembly uses a drill and wrench and takes about 1 to 2 hours. Build on a level foundation with the required tools and follow the photo instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe differ from the 3 Foot Wide model?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe four-foot ramp is 3 feet 2 inches tall, 6 feet 5 inches deep, weighs 175 pounds, and includes rear caster wheels. The smaller model is two feet tall, 3 feet 2 inches wide, four feet deep, weighs approximately 68 to 70 pounds, and has no rear wheels. Choose by complete geometry, approach space, and movement plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen should I choose one 4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe instead of the pair?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the single 4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe when one 3-foot-2-inch transition serves the space and one movement route is enough. The pair provides two complete 175-pound ramps that can face each other, sit separately, or move into storage on rear casters. Buy two only when both approaches, exits, and storage paths remain usable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe compare with the 6 Foot Wide model?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth ramps are 3 feet 2 inches tall, 6 feet 5 inches deep, and use rear caster wheels. The 4-foot model weighs 175 pounds; the 6-foot model adds two feet of coping span and weighs 215 pounds. Choose the larger span only when the rider will use it and the site keeps the approach and storage route clear.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the 4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the 4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp for transition practice such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and launching into a line. Its height, width, and mobility determine how it fits with the rest of the setup, so start with a clear approach and progress within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607707730103,"sku":"Q4","price":849.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39607707762871,"sku":"Q4+1xQuart","price":928.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/quart-4-wide-3.jpg?v=1729241247"},{"product_id":"micro-spine","title":"Micro Spine Skate Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeep the session moving both ways\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne approach does not have to be the whole session. The Micro Spine joins two transition faces in a narrow ramp, giving you a route over the center and another direction to come back from. Its 15-inch height makes it a different choice from a full-size quarter-pipe spine when you want that two-sided shape in your home setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eConnect \u003cem\u003etwo approaches\u003c\/em\u003e through the center\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA spine brings transition faces together back to back. On the Micro Spine, that shape gives you a feature to approach from either direction and work across within your ability. It serves a different session from a single kicker or flat ledge. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you picture how those movements fit the skating you enjoy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMeasure its length as well as its width\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Micro Spine is two feet wide but eight feet long, with a 15-inch height. The narrow body can be useful in a layout, provided both ends still have clear pavement for the approach and exit. Mark out the full length before choosing the spot, then add the space you will skate around it. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you make that check.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring a build plan to your first session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMicro Spine requires a drill, with assembly estimated at about one hour. Use the photo instructions to work through the two-sided build and leave room to organize the parts. If you are deciding between a kit and making a ramp from plans, our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-kit-vs-diy\"\u003eDIY, Kit or Custom guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how the design, sourcing and assembly work differ.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose the coating for exposed wood\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current Micro Spine choices let you order without Skate Paint or add one quart. That coating is for the exposed plywood, separate from the shape of the ramp and its riding layers. Think about where the spine will live and how you will care for it outdoors. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains the checks and upkeep to keep in your routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdd variety beyond another transition\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBefore filling the rest of the space, think about what the spine already gives you: two transition faces and a path across the middle. A separately sold \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/products\/grind-box-4-foot\"\u003e4 Foot Grind Box\u003c\/a\u003e can add ledge practice if grinds, slides or manuals are the next thing you want to work on. Keep each feature's approach clear so the new obstacle adds a useful part of the session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Micro Spine ramp kit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMicro Spine has an estimated one-hour assembly window and requires a drill. Its two 15-inch transition faces need an open approach on both sides, so settle the final placement after the build.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Micro Spine Skate Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does Micro Spine differ from the Quarter Pipe Spine Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eMicro Spine is the narrower, lower option at 15 inches high and two feet wide. Quarter Pipe Spine stands two feet high and is wider. Choose Micro Spine when a compact two-sided transition better fits the rider and site; choose the larger spine for more scale.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does Micro Spine compare with the Green Monster Flat Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eMicro Spine is a two-foot-wide, 15-inch-high ramp with transition faces on both sides. Green Monster is a 25-pound flat rail with an 11-to-14-inch adjustable height range and a body that separates for moving. Choose Micro Spine when the route needs a compact direction change; choose Green Monster when a narrow adjustable grinding surface is the missing obstacle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does Micro Spine compare with Launch WR?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eMicro Spine uses two back-to-back transition faces, while Launch WR combines a launch face with a wallie face. Compare the movement the rider wants to repeat. Both are compact multi-face obstacles, but they change direction in different ways and should not be treated as substitutes by name alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the Micro Spine Skate Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Micro Spine Skate Ramp as a line-building obstacle for launches, ollies, and other tricks that fit its exact shape. Give the feature a straight approach and clear landing or exit, then progress from basic rollovers and controlled launches within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Micro Spine Skate Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps and obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607709106359,"sku":"MicroSpine","price":399.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39607709139127,"sku":"MicroSpine+QSP","price":478.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/019.jpg?v=1729241247"},{"product_id":"quarter-pipe-ramp-8-foot-wide","title":"8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGive your home session room to open up\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf transition is what brings you back for another run, give it a bigger place in your setup. The 8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe offers a broad face and coping span at three feet two inches tall. Two plywood riding layers, photo-guided kit assembly and rear caster wheels bring the practical details together around a ramp made for a roomier session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdd \u003cem\u003ewidth without adding height\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis model has the same three-foot-two-inch height as the four- and six-foot-wide quarter pipes, with eight feet across the ramp instead. The difference is room across the transition and coping, not a taller drop. Think about the lines and coping tricks you want to work on when deciding whether that extra width belongs in your setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan a home for the whole ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn eight-foot width and six-foot-five-inch depth take up a meaningful part of a home skate space. Add the approach and return path before comparing that footprint with the area available. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e gives you a practical way to measure it. Need a different layout? \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eOC Ramps custom builds\u003c\/a\u003e can help you explore a park designed around your space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep the plywood ready for more sessions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe riding surface includes two plywood layers. Optional Skate Paint coats exposed wood to help protect it; it does not replace either layer or add a separate surface sheet. An outdoor ramp also needs ongoing attention beyond the initial coating. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan protection, checks and upkeep as part of owning your setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring the kit together with photo-guided assembly\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ramp arrives as a kit with the materials, hardware and photo instructions for assembly. You will need a drill and wrench, plus working space around the build. If putting it together is the part you would rather hand over, discuss your project with \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/installations\"\u003eOC Ramps installation services\u003c\/a\u003e before making your plans.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThink through storage before it is built\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRear caster wheels help move the quarter pipe, but its 350-pound weight and eight-foot width still matter. Choose a storage position and a clear route to it while you are planning the skate area. That way the ramp can work with the other things your space needs to do, not just the next session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 8-foot-wide quarter pipe ramp in the selected Skate Paint configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExterior-grade lumber and plywood parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003e8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly planning\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAssembly uses a drill and wrench and takes about 2 to 3 hours. Build on a level foundation with the required tools and follow the photo instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat distinguishes the 8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp from the Dave and Cody Equation model?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe two ramps share the same 3-foot-2-inch height, 8-foot width, 6-foot-5-inch depth, 350-pound weight, rear casters, two plywood riding layers, and optional two-quart Skate Paint choice. The Dave and Cody version adds The Equation identity. Choose that model when its signature context belongs in the setup; choose this standard model when the shared geometry and configuration are the deciding factors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen should I choose one 8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp instead of the pair?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the single ramp when one broad transition supplies the intended coping span and leaves the rest of the site open. The Pair of 8 Foot Quarter Pipes provides two complete 350-pound ramps that can face each other or anchor separate approaches. The pair is appropriate only when the property can support two full footprints, two clear routes, and planned movement and storage for both ramps.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp compare with the 8 Foot Wide Half Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe quarter pipe is one 3-foot-2-inch-tall transition with a 6-foot-5-inch depth and rear casters. The half pipe connects two sides across a 22-foot-8-inch length, starts 3.5 feet tall, and can add one 5-foot corner. Choose the quarter pipe when one movable return point fits the setup; choose the half pipe when the site and session call for a connected back-and-forth ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the 8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the 8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp for transition practice such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and launching into a line. Its height, width, and mobility determine how it fits with the rest of the setup, so start with a clear approach and progress within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607725588663,"sku":"Q8","price":1249.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2 Quarts","offer_id":39607725621431,"sku":"Q8+2xQuarts","price":1407.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/quart-6-wide-4.jpg?v=1729241248"},{"product_id":"quarter-pipe-ramps-two-3-foot","title":"Pair of 3 Foot Quarter Pipes","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTwo little ramps. More reasons to skate.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA few kickturns before dinner can become a session you keep coming back to. This pair gives you two matching, two-foot-tall quarter pipes to face toward each other or use in different parts of your setup. You choose the space between them, with compact ramps that let the arrangement change as your skating does.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive your session \u003cem\u003etwo ways back\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA second quarter pipe gives you another transition to return from. Face the ramps toward one another for back-and-forth runs, or separate them so each becomes part of a different line. They remain two independent ramps; the pavement between them is your riding area, not an included half-pipe flat bottom. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you compare the feel of those layouts.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCheck the space around each small ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach ramp stands two feet tall, measures three feet two inches wide overall and extends four feet from front to back. Those are per-ramp dimensions, so allow for both footprints and the clear ground you will skate between and around them. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you measure the approaches as well as the place the wood will sit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eProtect the plywood on both sides of the session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOrder the pair without Skate Paint or select two quarts for the exposed wood across both ramps. Skate Paint is a coating, not an extra plywood layer or a separate riding-surface sheet. If the ramps will stay outdoors, include their storage and regular care in the decision. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e covers what to look after between sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild one quarter pipe, then its partner\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit includes pre-cut and pre-drilled wood parts, assembly hardware and photo instructions. Have a drill ready and allow about 30 to 45 minutes per ramp as an estimate. Keep the first ramp's parts together as you work through the booklet, then repeat for the second. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/tools-needed-to-build-your-ramp\"\u003eKit Assembly guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you prepare the space and tools before opening the build.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLeave room for the rest of your skating\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTry the two transitions on their own before deciding what else belongs between them. An open lane lets you enjoy returning from one ramp toward the other; a new box or rail should add a trick you want without closing that lane. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003eTypes of Ramps guide\u003c\/a\u003e can help you choose a different obstacle when you are ready to expand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo 3-foot quarter pipe ramps in the selected Skate Paint configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExterior-grade lumber and plywood parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBoxed kit delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit arrives packaged for assembly. Keep the components together, inspect the shipment when it arrives, and report any visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly planning\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAssembly uses a drill and takes about 30 to 45 minutes per ramp. Build on a level foundation with the required tools and follow the photo instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Pair of 3 Foot Quarter Pipes\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen does the Pair of 3 Foot Quarter Pipes make more sense than one compact ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne 3 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe creates a single compact transition and can be ordered with plywood or Skatelite. This pair creates two matching two-foot-tall transitions that can face each other or support separate approaches, but it does not offer a premium sheet surface. Choose the pair only when two positions materially improve the session and the site can keep both routes clear; otherwise, one ramp is the simpler fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Pair of 3 Foot Quarter Pipes compare with the American Flag Quarter Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth use the compact two-foot-tall, roughly three-foot-wide, four-foot-deep transition. The pair supplies two matching ramps and offers an optional two-quart Skate Paint choice across them. The American Flag product is one 70-pound ramp with its graphic fixed to the design and no separate paint choice. Choose two configurable positions or one dedicated graphic statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Pair of 3 Foot Quarter Pipes differ from Greg Lutzka's 3 in 1?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe pair provides two dedicated two-foot quarter-pipe transitions that can be arranged around the site. Greg Lutzka's 3 in 1 is one 12-inch-tall, four-foot-wide, 39-inch-long obstacle that can work as a quarter pipe, ledge, or launch ramp according to the approach. Choose two matching transitions for back-and-forth variety or one smaller multi-role feature for a more compact setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice with Pair of 3 Foot Quarter Pipes?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eFace the pair for back-and-forth transition runs or use each quarter pipe as a separate return point in a larger line. Common progression includes kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and transfers that match the rider's ability and the available clearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Pair of 3 Foot Quarter Pipes if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607776051383,"sku":"2xQ3","price":758.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2 Quarts","offer_id":39607776084151,"sku":"2xQ3+2xQuarts","price":916.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/mirror-Q3.jpg?v=1729241247"},{"product_id":"quarter-pipe-ramps-two-4-foot","title":"Pair of 4 Foot Quarter Pipes","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMake room for another run\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eRide toward one quarter pipe, work the transition and come back with another ramp ahead of you. The four-foot pair brings two matching, three-foot-two-inch-tall transitions into your home setup. Rear caster wheels help you change their positions when you want a different line or need the space back between sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring a \u003cem\u003etaller transition\u003c\/em\u003e into the pair\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach four-foot-wide ramp stands three feet two inches tall, a step up in height from the compact two-foot-tall pair. Choose that geometry for the transition and coping practice you want, not just because the pair fits across your space. The ramps can face each other or serve separate lines; they do not join into one half pipe. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps explain that choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCount both footprints before choosing the gap\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach ramp is four feet wide and six feet five inches deep. You decide how far apart they sit, so there is no single combined footprint for the pair. Include open pavement for the runs you want to make, plus access around each ramp. Use our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e to see how those measurements work together.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUse the casters to make the space work\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRear caster wheels give each ramp a way to move when you change the layout. At 175 pounds per ramp, that flexibility works best with a clear route and a place already chosen for storage. Think through the moves before filling the surrounding space with other obstacles. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-foundations\"\u003eSite Preparation guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you consider the surface and access where the ramps will live.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep the two builds straightforward\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOC Ramps supplies pre-cut and pre-drilled components, counted screws, metal parts and a photo instruction booklet. You will need a drill and wrench. Work through one ramp at a time so its hardware and pieces stay organized, then use the same instructions for the second build. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/tools-needed-to-build-your-ramp\"\u003eKit Assembly guide\u003c\/a\u003e covers the preparation before the first screw goes in.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose wood protection for the pair\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe optional two-quart Skate Paint selection is for the exposed plywood across both ramps. It adds a coating, not a Skatelite or GatorSkins riding sheet. Choose it alongside a plan for looking after the wood once the pair is in use. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how plywood, coatings and separate surface panels do different jobs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo 4-foot quarter pipe ramps in the selected Skate Paint configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExterior-grade lumber and plywood parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePair of 4 Foot Quarter Pipes freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly planning\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse a drill and wrench to assemble the two ramps. Follow the photo instructions and build each ramp on a level foundation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Pair of 4 Foot Quarter Pipes\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen should I choose the Pair of 4 Foot Quarter Pipes instead of one four-foot ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach ramp in the pair shares the single model's 3-foot-2-inch height, 4-foot width, 6-foot-5-inch depth, 175-pound weight, and rear casters. The pair adds a second complete transition and uses a two-quart paint choice across both, while the single ramp uses one quart. Choose two only when facing or separated approaches justify the extra footprint, movement route, build, and storage position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Pair of 4 Foot Quarter Pipes compare with the Pair of 3 Foot Quarter Pipes?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe three-foot pair keeps each ramp two feet tall, four feet deep, and about 67 to 70 pounds. Each four-foot ramp rises to 3 feet 2 inches, reaches 6 feet 5 inches deep, weighs 175 pounds, and includes rear casters. Choose the compact pair for a smaller layout; choose four feet when the taller geometry and planned caster route fit the site.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat changes between the Pair of 4 Foot Quarter Pipes and the eight-foot pair?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth pairs use 3-foot-2-inch-tall, 6-foot-5-inch-deep ramps with rear casters. Each four-foot ramp weighs 175 pounds; each eight-foot ramp weighs 350 pounds and doubles the coping span. Choose four feet when two movable transitions need a more contained footprint. Move to eight feet only when the riders will use that width and the property can preserve two full approaches and storage routes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice with Pair of 4 Foot Quarter Pipes?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eFace the pair for back-and-forth transition runs or use each quarter pipe as a separate return point in a larger line. Common progression includes kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and transfers that match the rider's ability and the available clearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Pair of 4 Foot Quarter Pipes if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607772872887,"sku":"2xQ4","price":1669.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2 Quarts","offer_id":39607772905655,"sku":"2xQ4+2xQuarts","price":1827.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/5.jpg?v=1729241248"},{"product_id":"quarter-pipe-ramp-spine","title":"Quarter Pipe Spine Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGive the line a two-sided transition\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTake the line up one side and down the other. The Quarter Pipe Spine brings opposing transitions into one two-foot-high feature for sessions built around crossing the spine. Its three-foot-two-inch width gives you a defined target to approach from either direction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePut a \u003cem\u003espine in the line\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA spine brings opposing transitions together at the top, creating a different feature from a single quarter pipe. Choose it when crossing from one side to the other is part of the skating you want to work on. Plan clear approaches on both sides so the feature belongs in the whole run.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMatch the width to your approach\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe spine is three feet two inches wide and two feet high. Use those measurements to compare its scale with features you already skate. The width deserves as much attention as the height when you decide how the ramp will fit your approach.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLeave room on both sides\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe complete ramp is six feet four inches deep. Add the riding space on each side before marking its position, and keep those paths clear of other obstacles. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you turn the product dimensions into a layout you can actually skate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAssemble one complete spine kit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe spine arrives as a kit with photo instructions. Bring a drill and allow an estimated one to two hours for the build. Lay out the components and follow the manual to assemble the feature before moving on to the rest of your setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan the coating before the first session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe spine calls for one quart of Skate Paint. Account for the coating work when you plan the build, then include regular care as the ramp becomes part of your spot. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you look after the wood beyond assembly day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Quarter Pipe Ramp Spine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eQuarter Pipe Spine Ramp has an estimated one-to-two-hour assembly window and requires a drill. The completed two-foot spine needs room on both transition faces, making final placement part of the build decision.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Quarter Pipe Spine Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does Quarter Pipe Spine differ from Micro Spine?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eQuarter Pipe Spine stands two feet high and is 3 feet 2 inches wide, giving it more scale than the 15-inch-high, two-foot-wide Micro Spine. Both are two-sided, so choose between them by rider comfort and available room rather than product name alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does Quarter Pipe Spine compare with Jordan Hoffart's Speed Bump?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eQuarter Pipe Spine uses two curved transition faces over a shared center and stands two feet high. The Speed Bump is lower, broader, and built around one continuous bump profile. Choose the spine when two-way transition is the job; choose the Speed Bump when the route needs a wide flowing obstacle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eIs Quarter Pipe Spine the same as placing two separate quarter pipes back to back?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is sold as one purpose-built two-sided spine with a shared center. Two separate quarter pipes would remain independent products with their own placement and connection decisions. Choose the spine when one integrated transition over the center is the intended riding shape.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the Quarter Pipe Spine Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Quarter Pipe Spine Ramp as a line-building obstacle for launches, ollies, and other tricks that fit its exact shape. Give the feature a straight approach and clear landing or exit, then progress from basic rollovers and controlled launches within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Quarter Pipe Spine Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps and obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490541813943,"sku":"Spine","price":489.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/spine1.jpg?v=1729241247"},{"product_id":"quarter-pipe-ramps-two-8-foot","title":"Pair of 8 Foot Quarter Pipes","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGive both ends of the session room to open up\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo broad transitions can make a home spot feel very different. This pair gives you eight feet of width on each quarter pipe, with the freedom to face them together or use them in separate lines. They are substantial ramps, so choose the pair when your space lets you enjoy both faces and the open ground around them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUse all \u003cem\u003eeight feet of transition\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach ramp gives you eight feet across the face while keeping the three-foot-two-inch height shared with the narrower four- and six-foot models. That width is useful when you want more room to choose an approach across the transition. The two ramps remain independent, with your own riding space between them rather than an included half-pipe flat bottom. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you compare the arrangements.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake a layout around two full ramp bodies\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePer ramp, the dimensions are eight feet wide, six feet five inches deep and three feet two inches tall. Account for that footprint twice, then add the distance between the ramps and the space to approach and roll away. There is no fixed combined length. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you turn the layout you imagine into measurements on the ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan moves for two substantial ramps\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach eight-foot quarter pipe weighs 350 pounds. Rear caster wheels help with repositioning, but the route still needs to work for the ramp's size and weight. Choose the build, skating and storage locations together so you know where each ramp will go. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/shipping-delivery\"\u003eShipping and Delivery guide\u003c\/a\u003e also helps you think through the route from delivery to the build area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive each build the time it deserves\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAssembly is estimated at two to three hours per ramp, using a drill and wrench. The kit includes pre-cut and pre-drilled wood parts, counted screws, required metal components and photo instructions. Work through one complete ramp before starting its partner. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/tools-needed-to-build-your-ramp\"\u003eKit Assembly guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you organize a build area large enough to keep those pieces accessible.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCare for the plywood across both ramps\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach ramp has two plywood riding layers. Select no Skate Paint or add one gallon for the exposed wood across the pair. Paint is a protective coating; the option does not add a separate riding-surface sheet. Think about care for the decks, sides and other exposed wood as well as the riding faces. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you keep those checks in your routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo 8-foot quarter pipe ramps in the selected Skate Paint configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExterior-grade lumber and plywood parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePair of 8 Foot Quarter Pipes freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly planning\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAssembly uses a drill and wrench and takes about 2 to 3 hours per ramp. Build on a level foundation with the required tools and follow the photo instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Pair of 8 Foot Quarter Pipes\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen does the Pair of 8 Foot Quarter Pipes make more sense than one eight-foot ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne 8 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe gives the setup a single 350-pound transition. The pair supplies two complete ramps with the same geometry and rear casters, allowing a facing layout or separate approaches. Choose two only when that second broad transition changes the intended session and the property can support both footprints, routes, and storage positions. One ramp is the better choice when it already completes the setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Pair of 8 Foot Quarter Pipes compare with the four-foot pair?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth pairs use ramps that are 3 feet 2 inches tall, 6 feet 5 inches deep, and movable on rear casters. Each eight-foot ramp weighs 350 pounds and doubles the coping span of each 175-pound four-foot ramp. Choose the four-foot pair when a more contained layout preserves approaches and storage. Choose eight feet only when both broader transitions can be fully used without crowding the site.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Pair of 8 Foot Quarter Pipes differ from a 16 Foot Wide Half Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe pair provides two independent eight-foot-wide transitions that can move and face each other or serve separate approaches. The 16 Foot Wide Half Pipe is one connected 3.5-foot-tall, 22-foot-8-inch-long structure that can add one or two 5-foot corners. Choose the pair for rearrangeable return points; choose the half pipe for a fixed, continuous back-and-forth layout with broader width and optional raised corners.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice with Pair of 8 Foot Quarter Pipes?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eFace the pair for back-and-forth transition runs or use each quarter pipe as a separate return point in a larger line. Common progression includes kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and transfers that match the rider's ability and the available clearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Pair of 8 Foot Quarter Pipes if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607793680567,"sku":"2xQ8","price":2469.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Gallon","offer_id":39607793713335,"sku":"2xQ8+1xGallon","price":2668.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/img-two-quarter-pipe-ramp-8ft.jpg?v=1729241276"},{"product_id":"quarter-pipe-ramps-two-6-foot","title":"Pair of 6 Foot Quarter Pipe Ramps","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMore room across the transition. Twice.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen you want a wider approach without making the ramp taller, the six-foot pair gives both ends of your session more room. Each quarter pipe stands three feet two inches tall and offers six feet of riding width. Face them together for repeated runs or let each one serve its own line, with rear casters to help when the layout changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFind your line with a \u003cem\u003ewider approach\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompared with the four-foot pair, each six-foot ramp adds two feet of width while keeping the same height and depth. That extra span gives you more room across the transition to choose your approach and work toward the coping. Choose it because those wider faces will get used. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you weigh width separately from height.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive each ramp its own place in the layout\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery ramp is six feet wide, six feet five inches deep and three feet two inches tall. There are two of those bodies to place, with open ground between them for the session you want. The pair is not a joined half pipe or one 12-foot-wide ramp. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you map each footprint, approach and exit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep the wider setup adaptable\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach ramp weighs 216 pounds and has rear caster wheels for repositioning. Decide how you will move each one between its skating and storage positions before adding obstacles along those routes. The value is having a layout you can change deliberately, not being tied to the first arrangement. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-foundations\"\u003eSite Preparation guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you think through the surface and access.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild the second ramp with a clear reference\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit provides pre-cut and pre-drilled wood components, counted screws, required metal parts and photo instructions. Have a drill and wrench ready, and keep each ramp's components grouped while you work. Completing one before starting the other gives you a finished reference without mixing the two builds. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/tools-needed-to-build-your-ramp\"\u003eKit Assembly guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you set up the work area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo plywood layers, plus a coating choice\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth ramps include two plywood riding layers. The optional one-gallon Skate Paint selection serves a separate purpose: protecting the exposed wood across the pair. It does not add a riding sheet or replace the plywood layers. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains those roles, so you can make the surface and care decisions with the actual configuration in mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo 6-foot quarter pipe ramps in the selected Skate Paint configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExterior-grade lumber and plywood parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePair of 6 Foot Quarter Pipe Ramps freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly planning\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse a drill and wrench to assemble the two ramps. Follow the photo instructions and build each ramp on a level foundation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Pair of 6 Foot Quarter Pipe Ramps\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen does the Pair of 6 Foot Quarter Pipe Ramps make more sense than one six-foot ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe single model provides one 215-pound transition. This pair provides two matching 216-pound transitions, each with the same 3-foot-2-inch height, 6-foot width, 6-foot-5-inch depth, and rear casters. Choose the pair only when facing or separate approaches add a real session benefit and the site can carry two movement and storage plans. Otherwise, the single ramp preserves more open ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Pair of 6 Foot Quarter Pipes compare with the four-foot pair?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth pairs use 3-foot-2-inch-tall, 6-foot-5-inch-deep ramps with rear casters. Each six-foot ramp weighs 216 pounds and adds two feet of coping span beyond each 175-pound four-foot ramp. The six-foot pair also uses a one-gallon Skate Paint choice, while the four-foot pair uses two quarts. Choose by usable coping width, two complete footprints, and the movement routes the site can maintain.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Pair of 6 Foot Quarter Pipes differ from a 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe pair supplies two independent six-foot-wide transitions that can change position on rear casters. The 12 Foot Wide Half Pipe is one connected 3.5-foot-tall structure, 22 feet 8 inches long, with one optional 5-foot corner. Choose the pair when two movable approaches serve the site. Choose the half pipe when the property can support a fixed, wider back-and-forth layout and its corner decision.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice with Pair of 6 Foot Quarter Pipe Ramps?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eFace the pair for back-and-forth transition runs or use each quarter pipe as a separate return point in a larger line. Common progression includes kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and transfers that match the rider's ability and the available clearance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Pair of 6 Foot Quarter Pipe Ramps if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607787847863,"sku":"2xQ6","price":2069.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Gallon","offer_id":39607787880631,"sku":"2xQ6+1xGallon","price":2268.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/two-6-foot.jpg?v=1729241275"},{"product_id":"unicorn-skate-ramp","title":"Unicorn Quarter Pipe Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA unicorn ramp with room for the session\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring color to the setup without giving up room to skate. The Unicorn Skate Ramp combines an engraved, pre-painted side design with six feet of quarter-pipe width. Its two-foot-six-inch height gives you a transition to return to for kickturns and the next move you want to work on.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring home the \u003cem\u003eengraved unicorn\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe unicorn image is engraved into the plywood side, and the ramp arrives pre-painted in the colors shown. You can choose the illustrated design without adding a separate painting project to create that look. The skating setup gets its own character from the start.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive your approach six feet of width\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSix feet across the ramp gives you room to choose your position on the transition. Its two-foot-six-inch height defines the scale of the quarter pipe without adding height just to get more width. Consider both measurements when choosing the ramp you want to skate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMap the depth before choosing the spot\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Unicorn extends six feet five inches from front to back. Measure that depth together with the approach and return area, especially if the space also holds other obstacles. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you check the complete layout before the kit arrives.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild the quarter pipe with photo guidance\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Unicorn arrives in kit form with an instruction manual and photos. Allow an estimated one to two hours for assembly, with the parts laid out where you can follow the build sequence. That gives you a manageable project to plan before setting aside time for the first session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSet it where you want to skate\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAt 185 pounds, the Unicorn needs a considered place in the setup. Work out the route into position and where it will stay between sessions before assembling it. The plywood side design is part of a wooden ramp, so keep maintenance in the plan with our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 6-foot-wide Unicorn Quarter Pipe Ramp in the selected Skate Paint configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExterior-grade lumber and plywood parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eUnicorn Quarter Pipe Ramp freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly planning\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAssembly uses a drill and wrench and takes about 1 to 2 hours. Build on a level foundation with the required tools and follow the photo instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Unicorn Quarter Pipe Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Unicorn Quarter Pipe Ramp compare with the Blue Tile Quarter Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth are signature graphic ramps, but their geometry is different. The Unicorn is 2 feet 6 inches tall, 6 feet wide, 6 feet 5 inches deep, weighs 185 pounds, and uses rear wheels. The Blue Tile is 2 feet tall, 4 feet wide, 4 feet deep, weighs 68 pounds, and carries Brad McClain artwork. Choose the transition and footprint first, then the visual identity.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Unicorn Quarter Pipe Ramp differ from the American Flag Quarter Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Unicorn is a 2-foot-6-inch-tall, six-foot-wide transition with rear wheels, an engraved graphic, shown colors, and an optional one-quart Skate Paint choice. The American Flag model is a compact two-foot-tall, 3-foot-2-inch-wide, 70-pound ramp with a fixed graphic and no separate paint choice. Choose between the larger movable Unicorn layout and the smaller fixed-design transition the site can use comfortably.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Unicorn Quarter Pipe Ramp compare with the standard 4 Foot Wide Quarter Pipe?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Unicorn stands 2 feet 6 inches tall, spans six feet, weighs 185 pounds, and makes its engraved identity part of the product. The standard four-foot ramp is 3 feet 2 inches tall, weighs 175 pounds, uses rear casters, and offers a plain configurable presentation. Both are 6 feet 5 inches deep. Choose by transition height and usable width before deciding whether the Unicorn design belongs in the setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the Unicorn Quarter Pipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Unicorn Quarter Pipe Ramp for transition practice such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and launching into a line. Its height, width, and mobility determine how it fits with the rest of the setup, so start with a clear approach and progress within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Unicorn Quarter Pipe Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607806656695,"sku":"UnicornQ6","price":1499.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39607806689463,"sku":"UnicornQ6+Quart","price":1578.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/OCramps_UnicornRamp_7.jpg?v=1729241275"},{"product_id":"ramp-skate-paint","title":"Skateboard Ramp Paint","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePut wood care into the ramp plan\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eProtect the wood in your skate setup with Skate Paint, a clear coating designed specifically for wooden ramps. Keep the natural wood visible or add color after it cures. Choose the amount for a single obstacle or a larger ramp-coating job, then make protection part of keeping the setup ready to skate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose a coating for \u003cem\u003ewooden skate ramps\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkate Paint is designed for wood, including plywood and framing lumber. Apply it to the wooden parts of your ramp as part of the care plan. It is not for Masonite or tempered hardboard, so identify the surface you have before choosing the coating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose enough for the whole job\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA quart covers about fifty square feet, a gallon covers about 150 to 200 square feet, and the five-gallon bucket covers about 1,000 square feet. Add up the wooden areas you want to coat, using thirty-two square feet for each full four-by-eight-foot sheet, then choose the size that fits your project.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePrepare before opening the can\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eHave the ramp clean and the application area ready before you open Skate Paint. Once opened, the coating needs to be used within twenty-four hours; leftover paint cannot be saved for a later project. Organizing the work first helps you choose an amount you can use during that window.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLeave a day before the next session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkate Paint needs a full twenty-four hours to dry. Include that time when scheduling the coating work so painting does not compete with the session you have planned. Follow the application directions on the product and keep the ramp out of use while the coating dries.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep it clear or add color afterward\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkate Paint comes in clear. For a colored finish, let it cure before applying flat latex paint over it; do not mix color or thinner into Skate Paint itself. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan the coating work alongside the checks and upkeep your ramp needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne container of Ramp Skate Paint in the selected size\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePaint order timing\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkate Paint leaves the warehouse within one to three days and typically arrives three to six days after shipment. Use the carrier update when setting paint day, especially when the work depends on a dry-weather window.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eMade for real wood\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApply Skate Paint to real wood such as plywood or lumber. Do not use it on Masonite or tempered hardboard, and do not mix in colorants, thinner, or other additives.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eApplication and care\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRoll on one thick, even coat, allow 24 hours to dry, and keep using a tarp as part of the ongoing ramp-care plan. Open the container only when the full job is ready.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Skateboard Ramp Paint\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhy choose Skate Paint for a wooden skateboard ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkate Paint is designed specifically for wooden skateboard ramps. Choose it for compatible wood such as plywood, and follow its application directions. When considering another coating, check that product's intended use and compatibility with the riding surface instead of assuming all exterior-wood finishes serve the same purpose.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow do I reapply Skate Paint to a ramp that has already been coated?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eClean the ramp and remove debris before recoating. You do not need to sand away the entire original Skate Paint layer. Apply the fresh coat to a sound surface, then follow the same even-application and cure requirements used for the first coating job.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan Skate Paint be applied over an existing painted ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Skate Paint can adhere over an existing painted surface, although applying it directly to bare wood is preferred. Inspect the existing layer first, because the new coating bonds to what is beneath it and cannot correct peeling paint or damaged wood by itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow should I use Skateboard Ramp Paint?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse Skateboard Ramp Paint on properly prepared exposed plywood in a compatible ramp project. Match the amount to the project, follow the current application directions, and do not apply it over GatorSkins or Skatelite Pro top sheets.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Skateboard Ramp Paint if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/skate-paint\"\u003eSkate Paint sizes\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/1-quart-ramp-skate-paint\"\u003e1 Quart Ramp Skate Paint\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/1-gallon-ramp-skate-paint\"\u003e1 Gallon Ramp Skate Paint\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/5-gallon-ramp-skate-paint\"\u003e5 Gallon Ramp Skate Paint\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39712400015543,"sku":"QSP","price":79.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Gallon","offer_id":39712399982775,"sku":"GSP","price":199.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5 Gallons","offer_id":39712400081079,"sku":"BSP","price":699.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/1-gallon-oc-ramps.jpg?v=1633619813"},{"product_id":"gb-kicker","title":"GB Kicker Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA new way onto the box\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSometimes one small ramp changes what you want to try next. The GB Kicker gives you a low launch to skate on its own or a ramped approach to an OC Ramps Grind Box. Its nine-inch rise matches the box profile, so you can build a line around the ledge you already have in mind.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStart with a \u003cem\u003elow launch\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAt nine inches high, the GB Kicker adds a rise to flatground without taking on the scale of a bank or quarter pipe. Use it for launches and ollies that fit your skating, leaving a clear approach and landing. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e can help you decide whether a low kicker is the movement your setup is missing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMatch it to the Grind Box\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kicker's nine-inch height and 19-inch width align with the OC Ramps Grind Box profile. Choose the box length for the ledge session you want, then plan the kicker as its approach. The box is a separate purchase, so you can add the kicker to an existing setup or choose both together. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/products\/grind-box-4-foot\"\u003e4 Foot Grind Box\u003c\/a\u003e is one compact pairing to explore.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLeave a lane through the whole setup\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kicker itself measures four feet long and 19 inches wide. When it leads into a box, the useful measurement includes both obstacles, the run-in and the space beyond the ledge. Keep that route clear rather than fitting the ramp into whatever gap is left. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you check the complete line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eA short build with a clear starting point\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOC Ramps supplies the assembly hardware and photo instruction booklet with the kicker. A drill is required, and assembly is estimated at about ten minutes. Take the time to follow the instructions and check the finished ramp before the first session. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/tools-needed-to-build-your-ramp\"\u003eKit Assembly guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you get the tools and work area ready.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the plywood its own care plan\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe GB Kicker calls for one quart of Skate Paint for its exposed plywood. The coating protects the wood rather than changing the shape you skate. Plan that treatment and where the kicker will stay between sessions, especially outdoors. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains the inspection, cleaning and upkeep that go with a wooden obstacle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne GB Kicker ramp\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor GB Kicker Ramp, assembly is estimated at 10 minutes and the tools are drill. Follow the product instructions for the exact kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about GB Kicker Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow is the GB Kicker intended to work with an OC Ramps Grind Box?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe nine-inch height and 19-inch width align with the Grind Box profile, allowing the kicker to form a planned approach into the box. Choose the Grind Box length separately, then map the combined route so the connection improves the session instead of crowding it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhy would I choose the GB Kicker over the Wedge Bump?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the GB Kicker when its narrow profile and Grind Box relationship are the priority. Choose the broader Wedge Bump when a more general launch or connector fits the obstacle mix. The better ramp is the one that solves the actual route as opposed to the one with the bigger footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan the GB Kicker connect with different Grind Box lengths?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its matching nine-inch height and 19-inch width support the Grind Box profile while the box length is chosen as a separate product. Plan enough pavement for the selected length and kicker together so the combined feature has a usable run-in and roll-away.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the GB Kicker Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the GB Kicker Ramp as a line-building obstacle for launches, ollies, and other tricks that fit its exact shape. Give the feature a straight approach and clear landing or exit, then progress from basic rollovers and controlled launches within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the GB Kicker Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps and obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39490599092407,"sku":"GBK","price":159.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/kicker.jpg?v=1654711722"},{"product_id":"grind-box-8-foot","title":"8 Foot Grind Box","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGive that grind a longer ledge\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere is a good feeling in locking into a grind and having room to stay with it. The 8 Foot Grind Box brings that longer ledge to your home setup, keeping the same nine-inch height as the shorter boxes. Build the pre-cut, pre-drilled kit, find your approach and give the trick you have been working on another run.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStay with the trick for \u003cem\u003eeight feet\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe extra length is the reason to choose this box. Its eight-foot edge gives grinds and slides more distance to travel, while the broad top also opens up manual practice. At nine inches high and 19 inches deep, it keeps a low ledge profile. Think about whether you will use the whole length; the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/products\/grind-box-6-foot\"\u003e6 Foot Grind Box\u003c\/a\u003e is worth a look if the shorter line fits your space better.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose a spot for the full session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn eight-foot box needs more than an eight-foot opening. Leave enough pavement to approach, set your feet and ride away from the far end. The box weighs 68 pounds, so choose where it will live and plan any moves before assembling it. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you measure the skating area alongside access and storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePut the kit together, then put it to use\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wood arrives pre-cut and pre-drilled, with assembly hardware and instructions with photos. Allow about 25 minutes for assembly as an estimate, with room to organize the long pieces and work through the instructions. You are building from a defined kit instead of starting with a design and a list of materials to source. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/tools-needed-to-build-your-ramp\"\u003eKit Assembly guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how to prepare.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLook after the wood between sessions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eGalvanized metal and exposed plywood have different jobs on this box. The optional one-quart Skate Paint coats the wood; it does not add another riding-surface sheet or replace ongoing care. For an outdoor setup, think about protection and storage as part of the purchase. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e walks through what to inspect and maintain as the ledge gets used.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdd a ramped approach when you want one\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe separately sold \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/products\/gb-kicker\"\u003eGB Kicker\u003c\/a\u003e is designed to match the Grind Box's nine-inch height and 19-inch width. It gives you another way to approach the ledge when that fits the line you want to skate. With an eight-foot box already in place, map the kicker and the clear space around both pieces before adding it to your setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 8 Foot Grind Box in the selected Skate Paint option\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout 25 minutes to assemble\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 8 Foot Grind Box arrives pre-drilled and pre-cut, with about 25 minutes of assembly. Its 68-pound weight calls for a deliberate move and a stable position along the full eight-foot edge.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 8 Foot Grind Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 8 Foot Grind Box compare with the Green Monster Flat Rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Grind Box is a nine-inch-high, 19-inch-deep wooden ledge with an eight-foot body. Green Monster uses a flat metal working profile, adjusts from 11 to 14 inches, weighs 25 pounds, and separates for moving. Choose the Grind Box for a broad low ledge; choose Green Monster when an adjustable, lighter rail better fits the session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan the 8 Foot Grind Box work with the GB Kicker?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The GB Kicker matches the Grind Box profile and can create an approach into the box. Because the eight-foot ledge already needs a longer lane, map the combined setup carefully before deciding that both pieces belong in the same spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 8 Foot Grind Box compare with a shoe-box ledge?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Grind Box provides a straightforward low rectangular ledge, while the éS and HUF Shoe Boxes use much larger branded bodies with coping on both sides. Choose the eight-foot box when working length matters more than a signature silhouette or double-sided shoe form.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the 8 Foot Grind Box?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the 8 Foot Grind Box for ledge skills such as 50-50 grinds, boardslides, noseslides, and ollies on or off the obstacle. Where the top and geometry support it, riders can also work on manuals and nose manuals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 8 Foot Grind Box if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grind-boxes\"\u003egrind boxes and ledges\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607827234999,"sku":"G8","price":359.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39607827267767,"sku":"G8+QSP","price":438.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/OCramps_GrindBox_15_8ft.jpg?v=1729241276"},{"product_id":"grind-box-6-foot","title":"6 Foot Grind Box","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGive your next grind room to run\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen four feet feels too short for the line you have in mind, the 6 Foot Grind Box adds length without adding height. Its nine-inch-high ledge gives you room to work on grinds, slides and manuals at home. The pre-drilled kit includes wood, metal parts, hardware and photo instructions, putting the build within reach without asking you to design it from scratch.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePut \u003cem\u003etwo more feet\u003c\/em\u003e into your ledge session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompared with the four-foot box, this model adds two feet of length while keeping the same nine-inch height and 19-inch depth. That gives a grind, slide or manual more distance to travel, without moving to a taller obstacle. Choose the extra length for the tricks and approaches you want to practice, rather than assuming the biggest box is always the best fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLeave room before and after the ledge\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSix feet describes the box, not the full skating area. Plan the roll-up, space to set up your trick and a clear landing beyond it. The box weighs 45 pounds, so think through where it will stay between sessions and how you will move it when needed. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you check the complete line alongside the other uses of your space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSpend the build putting parts together\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOC Ramps supplies the wood components, galvanized metal parts, assembly hardware and photo instructions in one kit. Pre-drilled parts and an assembly estimate of about 20 minutes make this a different project from drawing plans and gathering materials yourself. If you are deciding how much of the build you want to take on, our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-kit-vs-diy\"\u003eDIY, Kit or Custom guide\u003c\/a\u003e compares the choices.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake wood protection part of the purchase\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe optional one-quart Skate Paint comes with the kit when selected, giving you a coating for the exposed wood. It does not change the ledge's dimensions or add a separate surface panel. For an outdoor setup, plan how you will protect and store the box as well as where you will skate it. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e covers the upkeep that belongs alongside regular sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild a line around the longer box\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA longer ledge can anchor a setup without being the only way you skate it. The separately sold \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/products\/gb-kicker\"\u003eGB Kicker\u003c\/a\u003e is designed to pair with OC Ramps grind boxes, offering a ramped approach when that suits your session. Start with the line you want to ride and leave room for the approach and exit before adding the next obstacle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 6 Foot Grind Box kit with product-specific wood, galvanized metal parts, hardware, and photo instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne quart of Skate Paint only when selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout 20 minutes to assemble\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 6 Foot Grind Box arrives pre-drilled and takes about 20 minutes to assemble. At 45 pounds, it can move between a garage and street spot with planning, but it should stay settled during use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 6 Foot Grind Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 6 Foot Grind Box compare with Cody McEntire's American Bench?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth are six feet long, but the Grind Box is a nine-inch-high rectangular ledge that weighs 45 pounds. Cody McEntire's American Bench stands 14 inches high, weighs 60 pounds, and uses a Butter working surface. Choose the Grind Box for a lower standard ledge; choose the signed bench when its taller form and Butter surface fit the session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan the 6 Foot Grind Box connect with the GB Kicker?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The GB Kicker matches the Grind Box at nine inches high and 19 inches wide, creating an optional approach into the longer ledge. Plan enough pavement for both products, complete each build, and make sure the joined route stays level and clear before riding.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 6 Foot Grind Box fit into a mixed obstacle setup?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eIts middle length can provide a substantial ledge without taking the full lane demanded by the eight-foot box. It works best when the surrounding setup needs a dedicated low edge and still has room for a rail, kicker, or transition to keep a separate route.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the 6 Foot Grind Box?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the 6 Foot Grind Box for ledge skills such as 50-50 grinds, boardslides, noseslides, and ollies on or off the obstacle. Where the top and geometry support it, riders can also work on manuals and nose manuals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 6 Foot Grind Box if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grind-boxes\"\u003egrind boxes and ledges\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607825498295,"sku":"G6","price":309.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39607825531063,"sku":"G6+QSP","price":388.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/OCramps_GrindBox_13_6ft.jpg?v=1729241275"},{"product_id":"grind-box-4-foot","title":"4 Foot Grind Box","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eYour own ledge. Your next trick.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat grind you nearly landed deserves another try. The 4 Foot Grind Box gives your home setup a dedicated ledge for grinds, slides and manuals, without taking on the footprint of a larger ramp. OC Ramps supplies the pre-drilled kit, hardware and photo instructions, so you can build a spot to skate instead of starting with a lumber list.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring \u003cem\u003eledge sessions\u003c\/em\u003e closer to home\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA grind box turns open flatground into a place to work on a different part of your skating. Practice approaching the edge, finding your balance in a grind or slide, or holding a manual across the top. Choose tricks that suit your ability and keep the landing area clear. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you compare a ledge with a rail or transition ramp when deciding what your setup needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFit the whole line, not just four feet of box\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe box measures four feet long, 19 inches deep and nine inches high. Leave room to roll toward it, set up your trick and ride away; those movements need more space than the box alone. At 34 pounds, it can be repositioned as your setup changes, but plan a clear route and suitable storage space. Use our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e to map the session before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild the kit without sourcing every part\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get the wood components, galvanized metal parts, assembly hardware and instructions with photos. The parts arrive pre-drilled, with an assembly estimate of about 20 minutes. It is a practical option when you want to put a box together yourself without designing and sourcing the whole project. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-kit-vs-diy\"\u003eDIY, Kit or Custom guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains what changes between those approaches.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eProtect the wood you will keep coming back to\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the one-quart Skate Paint option to include a protective coating for the exposed wood. Paint is separate from the box's wood and metal construction; it is not an additional riding-surface sheet. If you will keep the box outdoors, include care and storage in your plan from the start. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how to look after a wooden setup between sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdd another way onto the box\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWant to change the approach as your setup grows? The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/products\/gb-kicker\"\u003eGB Kicker\u003c\/a\u003e is designed to pair with OC Ramps grind boxes, adding a ramped approach to the ledge. It is sold separately, so you can start with the box and decide later whether the kicker adds the kind of line you want to skate. Leave enough room around both pieces rather than filling every available space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 4 Foot Grind Box kit with product-specific wood, galvanized metal parts, hardware, and photo instructions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne quart of Skate Paint only when selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAbout 20 minutes to assemble\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 4 Foot Grind Box arrives pre-drilled and takes about 20 minutes to assemble. Its 34-pound build is intended to be portable, so choose a level skating position and a practical storage spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 4 Foot Grind Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 4 Foot Grind Box compare with the Double Step Ledge?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 4 Foot Grind Box keeps one nine-inch working height in a four-foot-long, 19-inch-deep body. Double Step extends six feet and connects 6.5-inch and 12-inch ledge levels. Choose the Grind Box when compact size and one consistent edge matter; choose Double Step when the setup can use a larger footprint and built-in height changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan the 4 Foot Grind Box be used with the GB Kicker?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The GB Kicker matches the Grind Box at nine inches high and 19 inches wide, so it can form a planned approach into the box. Map the combined run-in and roll-away first, then assemble and secure each product according to its own instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat role does the 4 Foot Grind Box add beside a skate rail?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe box supplies a low, broad ledge body, while a rail provides a narrower elevated working surface. Choose the four-foot box when the setup needs a compact ledge rather than another rail. Owning both only makes sense if their routes do not compete for the same limited space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat tricks can riders practice on the 4 Foot Grind Box?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the 4 Foot Grind Box for ledge skills such as 50-50 grinds, boardslides, noseslides, and ollies on or off the obstacle. Where the top and geometry support it, riders can also work on manuals and nose manuals.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 4 Foot Grind Box if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grind-boxes\"\u003egrind boxes and ledges\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607823663287,"sku":"G4","price":239.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1 Quart","offer_id":39607823696055,"sku":"G4+QSP","price":318.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/OCramps_GrindBox_3_4ft.jpg?v=1729241277"},{"product_id":"3-tall-halfpipe-x-8-wide","title":"3 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMore runs. Less waiting for the next park trip.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat trick you nearly linked deserves another run. The 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe gives you a connected transition setup at home, with 8-, 12- and 16-foot widths to choose from. Keep the three-foot height and choose how much room you want across the ramp, then select the riding surface for the setup you will keep coming back to.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep the \u003cem\u003ethree-foot transition\u003c\/em\u003e. Choose your width.\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis ramp stays three feet tall as the width changes from eight to twelve or sixteen feet. That lets you add room across the transition without choosing a taller ramp. Think about the approaches you enjoy and how much of the coping span you will use. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you separate the height decision from the width decision.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the ramp a place in everyday life\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe eight-foot-wide version measures 21 feet eight inches long. Mark out that ramp body and leave space to reach the decks, move around it and carry out the build. For a wider version, work from its selected dimensions rather than assuming every measurement stays the same. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you include the surrounding area in the decision.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose what you will skate on\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne plywood riding layer is included. You can select a second plywood layer, GatorSkins in Brown or Green, or Skatelite Pro as the surface option. An extra wood layer, a separate riding panel and a paint coating are different things; choose them for their actual role rather than treating every option as another layer of the same material. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains the choices.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLook after the wood beyond the riding face\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkate Paint is an optional coating for exposed plywood, not a replacement for the riding-surface choice. The amount supplied when selected follows the ramp's width and surface configuration. With a GatorSkins or Skatelite top, wood elsewhere on the ramp still needs care, and the coating stays off those panels. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e covers what to inspect and maintain between sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eEnjoy the build with a kit behind you\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOC Ramps supplies pre-cut and pre-drilled parts, counted hardware and photo instructions. The eight-foot version calls for a drill and an estimated four to six hours of assembly. If your idea needs a different height, transition or layout, talk with \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eOC Ramps custom builds\u003c\/a\u003e before committing to a standard kit. You can start that conversation with the skating you want and the space you have.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 3-foot-tall halfpipe ramp kit in the selected 8-, 12-, or 16-foot width\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne plywood riding-surface base layer, with the selected second-plywood or premium-surface upgrade added when chosen\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSix, nine, or 12 premium-surface sheets when selected, matched to the ramp width\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe correct Skate Paint amount for the selected width and surface when paint protection is selected\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-counted rust-resistant screws and required galvanized metal parts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePre-cut and pre-drilled boards with computer-cut transition pieces\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShipping to the contiguous U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003e3 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp freight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eBuild it yourself or add installation\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring a drill and plan 4 to 6 hours for the 8-foot version to assemble the kit. Paid installation is available by quote. Travel, timing, site preparation, and pricing are quoted for each project.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp compare with the Garage Mini Ramp Kit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 3 Foot Tall model holds a three-foot transition and offers 8-, 12-, or 16-foot widths; its eight-foot version is 21 feet 8 inches long. The Garage Mini Ramp stays 26 inches tall, uses the same width choices, and is 15 feet 8 inches long at eight feet wide. Choose between transition height, finished length, and the site each leaves usable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow much Skate Paint comes with each 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp configuration?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor a plywood surface, select one gallon at 8 feet wide and two gallons at 12 or 16 feet. With GatorSkins or Skatelite Pro, only exposed plywood is painted: the 8- and 12-foot versions use one quart, while the 16-foot version uses one gallon. The selected paint amount follows both width and surface, not width alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat can riders practice on the 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp for repeated transition runs and progression on skills such as kickturns, rock-to-fakies, axle stalls, and linking tricks from wall to wall. The exact progression should match the rider's ability, the selected transition, and the clear skating area around the ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow much room should I plan around the 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart with the assembled dimensions for the selected width, height, corner, and surface configuration. Then leave a clear approach, roll-away, deck access, and enough working room for assembly and maintenance. Confirm the actual site before ordering; the listed product footprint alone is not the same as a complete skating-area plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan OC Ramps build a custom version of the 3 Foot Tall Halfpipe Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. If the standard width, height, transition, or corner layout does not fit the site or intended riding, start with OC Ramps' Custom Builds page. Share the usable footprint, rider needs, desired transition, access, and location so the project can be evaluated as a custom build instead of forcing a standard kit into the wrong space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003ePlan the ramp before the build\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/custom-skateboard-ramps\"\u003eExplore custom skate ramp builds\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"8 ft \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39508621983927,"sku":"3'Tallx8ftWide","price":2799.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"8 ft \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39508622016695,"sku":"3'Tallx8ftWide+2Plywood","price":3258.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"8 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182318319,"sku":"H3-8-P0-GB6","price":4113.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"8 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182351087,"sku":"H3-8-P0-GG6","price":4113.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"8 ft \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50318182383855,"sku":"H3-8-P0-SL6","price":4503.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"8 ft \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":39606109634743,"sku":"3'Tallx8ftWide+GSP","price":2998.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"8 ft \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":39606110388407,"sku":"3'Tallx8ftWide+2Plywood+GSP","price":3457.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"8 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182416623,"sku":"H3-8-P1Q-GB6","price":4192.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"8 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182449391,"sku":"H3-8-P1Q-GG6","price":4192.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"8 ft \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50318182482159,"sku":"H3-8-P1Q-SL6","price":4582.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 ft \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":42430972330223,"sku":"3'Tallx12ftWide","price":4099.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 ft \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":42430972461295,"sku":"3'Tallx12ftWide+2Plywood","price":4798.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182514927,"sku":"H3-12-P0-GB9","price":6070.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182547695,"sku":"H3-12-P0-GG9","price":6070.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 ft \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50318182580463,"sku":"H3-12-P0-SL9","price":6655.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 ft \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":42430972395759,"sku":"3'Tallx12ftWide+2xGSP","price":4497.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 ft \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":42430972526831,"sku":"3'Tallx12ftWide+2Plywood+2xGSP","price":5196.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182613231,"sku":"H3-12-P1Q-GB9","price":6149.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182645999,"sku":"H3-12-P1Q-GG9","price":6149.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 ft \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50318182678767,"sku":"H3-12-P1Q-SL9","price":6734.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 ft \/ No \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":42430972362991,"sku":"3'Tallx16ftWide","price":5199.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 ft \/ No \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":42430972494063,"sku":"3'Tallx16ftWide+2Plywood","price":6098.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182711535,"sku":"H3-16-P0-GB12","price":7827.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 ft \/ No \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182744303,"sku":"H3-16-P0-GG12","price":7827.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 ft \/ No \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50318182777071,"sku":"H3-16-P0-SL12","price":8607.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 ft \/ Yes \/ 1 Plywood Layer","offer_id":42430972428527,"sku":"3'Tallx16ftWide+2xGSP","price":5597.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 ft \/ Yes \/ 2 Plywood Layers","offer_id":42430972559599,"sku":"3'Tallx16ftWide+2Plywood+2xGSP","price":6496.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Brown (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182809839,"sku":"H3-16-P1G-GB12","price":8026.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 ft \/ Yes \/ GatorSkins — Green (Best Value)","offer_id":50318182842607,"sku":"H3-16-P1G-GG12","price":8026.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"16 ft \/ Yes \/ Skatelite Pro","offer_id":50318182875375,"sku":"H3-16-P1G-SL12","price":8806.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/GOPR766_ed1a6f33-12fe-4da5-acb0-e104f888f9bd.jpg?v=1729241278"},{"product_id":"oc-barrier","title":"OC Skate Barrier","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBring barrier sessions home\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe OC Barrier brings the Jersey Barrier shape into your own setup for boardslides and lipslides. Fill it with water to add weight, or connect multiple barriers when you want to extend the feature. Build the session around the barrier line you want to skate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePut the \u003cem\u003eJersey Barrier shape\u003c\/em\u003e in your spot\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the OC Barrier when a barrier is the street feature you want to skate at home. Its Jersey Barrier form gives the setup a different target from a box or a rail. Think about the approach that attracts you to barrier skating and give that route a place in your layout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake a boardslide the session's focus\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the barrier to work on boardslides or lipslides. Pick the approach you want to practice and keep the landing area open for another attempt. You can make the barrier the whole session or link it with the other features you already skate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdd weight with water\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe barrier can be filled with water to add weight. Plan that step when positioning it for a session, then check the setup before skating. Added weight is part of preparing the obstacle; keep the approach, landing and placement in the plan too.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eConnect barriers for a longer feature\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMultiple OC Barriers can connect together, letting you extend the feature when a longer barrier line suits the session. Decide how much of the spot you want to give it and plan the approach around the connected arrangement. Keep that additional riding area in mind when expanding.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLeave room for the whole approach\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA barrier line needs room on the side you approach and the side you land. Before adding it to a busy setup, trace the route past nearby ramps and obstacles. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan that shared space, whether you use one barrier or connect several.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne OC Barrier in the selected color\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAdd stability or connect another barrier\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 15-pound OC Barrier can be weighted with water, and multiple barriers can connect into a longer obstacle. Choose the Red or White barrier, then set the 40-inch-wide form securely for the intended arrangement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about OC Skate Barrier\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the OC Barrier compare with a fixed ledge?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Barrier offers a Jersey-style body that can stand alone or connect with another unit, while a fixed ledge provides a defined working edge and settled length. Choose the Barrier when its shape and modular growth matter more than owning a traditional rectangular box.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWho benefits most from starting with one Barrier and expanding later?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart with one when a single barrier gives you the feature you want to skate now. You can connect additional OC Barriers later if you want a longer line and have room for it. Let the way you use the first barrier guide the expansion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen does the water-fill feature create an ownership tradeoff?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eWater adds settling weight after placement but makes movement and storage less convenient until it is managed. That tradeoff matters when the setup changes often. Choose the fillable Barrier when added stability is useful and the owner has a practical routine for relocating or storing it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the OC Skate Barrier?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the OC Skate Barrier as a street-inspired obstacle for line planning, approach control, and tricks that match its exact shape. Start by rolling past or over the feature, then add suitable ollies, taps, slides, or grinds only where the product geometry supports them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the OC Skate Barrier if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/road-series\"\u003eExplore the Road Series\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Red","offer_id":39502512062647,"sku":"Barrier_red","price":129.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false},{"title":"White","offer_id":39502512095415,"sku":"Barrier_offwhite","price":129.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/JerseyBarrier11.jpg?v=1729241276"},{"product_id":"caution-skateboarding","title":"Caution Skate Obstacle: Skateboarding Sign","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGive your ollie a sign to clear\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Caution Skateboarding Sign gives ollies and kickflips a recognizable target. The two-foot-high plastic sign weighs two pounds, so it is a feature you can reposition as the session changes. Bring it into the line for the trick you want to work on next.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdd \u003cem\u003eskateboarding-sign character\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis caution sign is made specifically for skateboarders, bringing a familiar sign shape into the spot. Choose it as a recognizable object in the line or in a photo of the session. Explore the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/collections\/road-series\"\u003eRoad Series collection\u003c\/a\u003e for other street-inspired obstacles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWork on ollies and kickflips over it\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the sign as a target for an ollie or kickflip. Give the approach and landing a clear place in your setup, then return to the same target for another attempt. Choose the trick around what you want to practice during that session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose a two-foot-high target\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe sign stands two feet tall. Compare that height with the target you want to clear before choosing its place in the line. If you want to vary the target height instead, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/products\/skate-cones\"\u003eSkate Cones\u003c\/a\u003e provide a bar with four positions to compare.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTake a two-pound feature to the next spot\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe plastic sign weighs two pounds. Plan it into the equipment you carry to a session, then reposition it when you change the approach. Its light weight is useful when you want a sign target that moves with the day's layout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake room around the base\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe base is eleven and a half inches wide. Place it with room for the run-in and landing instead of using that base measurement as the whole skating area. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you keep the riding route clear around a small obstacle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne Caution Skateboarding sign obstacle\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSet the lightweight sign for each session\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAt two pounds, the plastic Caution Skateboarding Sign is easy to reposition. Set the 11.5-inch base flat and clear of other traffic before each session so the portable target stays where the rider expects it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Caution Skate Obstacle: Skateboarding Sign\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Caution Skate Obstacle: Skateboarding Sign differ from the A-Frame Construction Sign?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Caution sign is the lighter, smaller option: it is two feet tall, weighs two pounds, and uses plastic construction. The A-Frame is a larger 40-inch, 25-pound obstacle. Choose the Caution sign for an easily moved target and visual accent.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can the Caution Sign add to an existing ramp setup?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse it as a separate target for ollies or kickflips. Place it where the approach and landing work with the rest of the line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I use the sign as a target for repeated attempts or filming?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Choose its place as a visible ollie or kickflip target and keep the approach and landing clear. Its recognizable form can also be part of a filmed session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the Caution Skateboarding Sign?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the sign as a target to ollie or kickflip over. Plan the approach and landing around its two-foot height and the trick you intend to practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Caution Skate Obstacle: Skateboarding Sign if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/road-series\"\u003eSee more Road Series obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39502513504439,"sku":"caution","price":29.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/CautionSign3.jpg?v=1729241275"},{"product_id":"a-frame-construction","title":"A-Frame Skate Obstacle: Construction Sign","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBring a road-style target into the line\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe A-Frame Construction sign brings a road-style obstacle to launch-over practice. Pair it with a Wedge Ramp when that is the approach you want to skate, and use its forty-inch height as the target you plan around. The twenty-five-pound feature can move with the layout of your spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdd the \u003cem\u003econstruction-sign look\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Road Series A-Frame brings the familiar construction-sign form into a skate setup. Choose it when that street-style object is the target you want in your line. See the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/collections\/road-series\"\u003eRoad Series collection\u003c\/a\u003e for other shapes to work into the spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUse a wedge approach for launch-over practice\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe A-Frame can be paired with a \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/products\/wedge-bump-ramp\"\u003eWedge Ramp\u003c\/a\u003e for practice launching over the sign. Choose the placement around the approach and landing you intend to use. The ramp is a separate feature to consider for that line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan the forty-inch target\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe sign stands forty inches high, with a thirty-nine-inch width and twenty-eight-inch depth. Use those measurements to judge the target and mark its place in the line. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you allow for the approach and landing beyond the sign itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMove it when the session changes\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe A-Frame weighs twenty-five pounds and is designed to be portable. Reposition it as you change the line or put the spot away after skating. Choose a place for it between sessions so handling the sign fits the way you use the space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBring the feature to an outdoor spot\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe materials are designed for outdoor use, making the A-Frame an option for sessions outside. Keep the sign's condition and placement in your setup checks as you use it. That gives the road-inspired feature a practical place in a changing outdoor line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne A-Frame Construction Road Series obstacle\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003ePlace the 25-pound sign securely\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe A-Frame Construction Sign is portable, but its 40-inch profile still needs level ground and a settled position before anyone skates around it. Move it between sessions, then keep the 39-by-28-inch base out of another obstacle's path.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about A-Frame Skate Obstacle: Construction Sign\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the A-Frame Skate Obstacle: Construction Sign compare with the Caution Skateboarding Sign?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe A-Frame is the larger, heavier roadwork obstacle at 40 inches high and 25 pounds. The Caution sign is a two-foot, two-pound plastic target. Choose the A-Frame when the setup can support a more substantial construction-sign form; choose Caution when very light handling and smaller storage matter more.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhat should I consider when choosing the A-Frame as a trick target?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse its forty-inch height and thirty-nine-by-twenty-eight-inch footprint to assess the target. Plan the approach and landing for the trick you intend to practice, including space for a separate Wedge Ramp if you use one.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen should I choose the A-Frame rather than a rail or ledge?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the A-Frame for a construction-sign target to launch over. A rail or ledge serves grind-and-slide practice. Start with the trick you want to work on, then choose the feature that provides that target.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the A-Frame Construction Sign?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse it as a target for launch-over practice, including a line with a separate Wedge Ramp. Allow room for the intended approach and landing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the A-Frame Skate Obstacle: Construction Sign if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/road-series\"\u003eSee more Road Series obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39502513766583,"sku":"Aframe_sign","price":139.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/AFrameBarrier1.jpg?v=1729241278"},{"product_id":"skate-cones","title":"Skate Cones","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGive the next ollie a target\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSet the Skate Cones' bar at five, nine, thirteen or seventeen inches and choose the height you want to work on. The set includes two cones and one thirty-eight-inch bar, giving ollie practice a repeatable target you can adjust between attempts.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSet a \u003cem\u003etarget for your ollie\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the bar as a visible target when working on an ollie or another trick over an obstacle. Set it at the height you want to practice, then give yourself a clear approach and landing. The bar makes the target consistent as you return for another attempt.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose from four bar heights\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bar positions are five, nine, thirteen and seventeen inches. Move between those settings as you choose the challenge for the session or return to a familiar height to work on consistency. You do not have to use the highest setting to give the practice a purpose.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePractice over a thirty-eight-inch bar\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne thirty-eight-inch bar spans the two cones. Position the set around the path you intend to jump across, keeping the cones and the landing area in view. The bar's length describes the included target, so allow additional space around the set for the full run.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep cone height separate from jump height\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cones stand twenty inches tall, while the highest bar position is seventeen inches. Use the bar setting when choosing the height you want to clear. That distinction helps you plan the practice target without mistaking the top of the cones for another adjustment position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake room for repeat attempts\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe set weighs seven pounds. Choose a place where you can lay out the approach, landing and route back for another run, and account for putting the set away afterward. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you reserve the riding area around a small obstacle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo skate cones\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne 38-inch ollie bar with 5-, 9-, 13-, and 17-inch height settings\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eSet one of four bar heights\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePlace the 38-inch ollie bar at 5, 9, 13, or 17 inches, then make sure both cones sit securely. The seven-pound set is easy to move when the practice target changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Skate Cones\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow do Skate Cones compare with a compact Wedge Bump?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkate Cones create an adjustable horizontal target using a 38-inch bar and four height settings. A Wedge Bump is a structural takeoff that launches the rider from a plywood ramp face. Choose the cones for a movable practice goal; choose the wedge when the setup needs an actual launch surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow do Skate Cones compare with the Caution Skateboarding Sign?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkate Cones give you an adjustable bar target at five, nine, thirteen or seventeen inches. The Caution Skateboarding Sign is a two-foot-high plastic sign that can also serve as an ollie target. Choose the cones when changing the target height is the job you want to do.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhen is Starter Package 1 a better starting point than Skate Cones?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eConsider Starter Package 1 when you want a broader ramp-and-equipment setup. Skate Cones suit a session that already has the other equipment covered and needs an adjustable ollie target. Choose around what is missing from the setup, rather than adding more obstacles simply to have more.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can skaters use the Skate Cones?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the cones for slalom lines, turning drills, approach markers, or ollie practice. Adjust the included bar to create a visible clearance goal that matches the rider's current ability, then raise it gradually as consistency improves.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Skate Cones if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/road-series\"\u003eSee more Road Series obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39502561116343,"sku":"skate_cones","price":69.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/Cones1.jpg?v=1729241277"},{"product_id":"gator-skins-4-x-8","title":"Gator Skins Ramp Surface Panels","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlan the ramp around the panels you will receive\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGive your outdoor ramp a composite riding surface in Brown or Green with GatorSkins. Choose the look for your setup, then simplify an OC Ramps kit build with optional panel preparation. Each sheet measures forty-eight by ninety-four inches, so you can plan the surface around the panels you will receive.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose a \u003cem\u003ecomposite ramp surface\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eGatorSkins uses paper saturated with phenolic resin, then pressed and cured into panels for ramp surfacing. Consider it as the riding-surface material for the setup you are building or refreshing. Keep the ramp's supporting construction and the surface installation together in the project plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUse ninety-four inches in your layout\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach panel is forty-eight inches wide and ninety-four inches long. That is two inches shorter than a full eight-foot sheet, so use the supplied size when planning cuts and coverage. Check the panel layout before ordering rather than treating the product's four-by-eight name as an exact measurement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSurface the ramp you skate outdoors\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eGatorSkins is made for outdoor ramp surfacing, giving you a composite panel option for the setup that lives outside. Keep care of the complete ramp alongside the surface choice. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan the cleaning, checks and protection that support regular sessions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose Brown or Green for the ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSelect Brown or Green for the surface you want in your setup. Either color can be ordered without the preparation service or with preparation for an eligible OC Ramps kit. Choose the color and preparation together so the order matches both the look and the build you have planned.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHave the panels prepared for your kit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor an OC Ramps kit, add pre-drilling, countersinking and cutting to size so those jobs are handled before installation. If you are building a DIY ramp, order without the preparation service and work to your own design. Both choices start with the same forty-eight-by-ninety-four-inch panel size.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne 48-by-94-inch GatorSkins panel in the selected Brown or Green color and prep configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eConfirm surface-sheet shipping\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOC Ramps will confirm the shipping cost for the exact sheet quantity and order configuration. Standalone and bundled surface-sheet terms must not be inferred from the sitewide shipping message.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFreight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eInstall from the exact ramp plan\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne quantity is one 48-by-94-inch GatorSkins panel in the selected Brown or Green color. Use the measured ramp surface to determine seams, cuts, fasteners, and total quantity before installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about GatorSkins 4 x 8 Ramp Surface Panel\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eDoes GatorSkins replace the structural plywood in a ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eGatorSkins serves as the final riding surface. Keep the ramp's supporting structure specified by its construction plan, then lay out the selected Brown or Green panels over the prepared ramp surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eDoes choosing GatorSkins remove the need to plan a proper halfpipe foundation?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Choosing a riding-surface panel does not replace planning the ramp's base and supporting structure. Follow the ramp's construction plan, then use the forty-eight-by-ninety-four-inch panel dimensions to work out the surface layout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWill GatorSkins eliminate ongoing protection and care for an outdoor ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Keep the complete ramp in the care plan, including its supporting wood, fasteners, seams and surroundings. Follow the relevant ramp and surface care directions rather than assuming that changing the riding surface removes those jobs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow are GatorSkins panels used?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eGatorSkins are final riding-surface panels for a compatible skate ramp project. Match the panel count and cut plan to the exact ramp, choose the listed Brown or Green configuration, and use the OC Ramps preparation service only with a compatible OC Ramps kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the GatorSkins 4 x 8 Ramp Surface Panel if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/ramp-surface\"\u003eramp surfaces\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Brown \/ None","offer_id":39508544356535,"sku":"GatorSkins-Brown","price":180.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":false},{"title":"Green \/ None","offer_id":39508544389303,"sku":"GatorSkins-Green","price":180.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Brown \/ Pre-Drill + Countersink + Cut (OC Ramps kits ONLY)","offer_id":39606818406583,"sku":"GatorSkins-Predrill-Brown","price":219.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Green \/ Pre-Drill + Countersink + Cut (OC Ramps kits ONLY)","offer_id":39606818930871,"sku":"GatorSkins-Predrill-Green","price":219.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/Gator-Skins-Sale.jpg?v=1729241277"},{"product_id":"wedge-bump-ramp","title":"Wedge Bump Skate Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFind the takeoff for your next line\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA gap you want to work toward. A box that could use a different approach. The Wedge Bump adds a compact launch point you can build a session around, then move when a new idea comes along. Its 12-inch rise and 38-inch width give it a broader takeoff than the narrow GB Kicker without taking over the space like a large bank.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive flatground a \u003cem\u003etakeoff point\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wedge rises 12 inches, creating a launch for tricks that fit your ability and the space around you. It can be the feature you practice on by itself before you start adding gaps or other obstacles. Begin with the movement you want to repeat; our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramps-101\"\u003eTypes of Ramps guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you compare a launch with a ledge, rail or transition.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUse the width without losing the landing\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAt 38 inches wide and four feet long, the Wedge Bump provides a compact ramp body. The skating area still needs a clear run-in and enough space beyond the takeoff for your intended line. Measure those movements alongside the ramp rather than treating its footprint as the whole session. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e shows what to include.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChange the layout when the idea changes\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Wedge Bump can move from one part of your setup to another, giving a box, rail or gap a different approach. At 45 pounds, it calls for deliberate handling and a settled position before skating. Plan the relationship between the pieces and keep the landing open; a useful connection needs more thought than simply putting two obstacles close together.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTake on a focused kit build\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ramp comes with required assembly hardware and a photo instruction booklet. You will need a drill, with assembly estimated at 20 to 40 minutes. Set aside a work area where you can lay out the parts and follow the steps without competing with the skating area. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/tools-needed-to-build-your-ramp\"\u003eKit Assembly guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you prepare for the build.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose the approach your box needs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Wedge Bump is the broader, taller launch of these two options. If your main goal is a ramp that matches an OC Ramps Grind Box, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/products\/gb-kicker\"\u003eGB Kicker\u003c\/a\u003e's nine-inch height and 19-inch width are designed for that connection. Keep the Wedge Bump in mind when you want a more general takeoff that can serve different parts of your setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Wedge Bump Ramp\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor Wedge Bump Skate Ramp, assembly is estimated at 20-40 minutes and the tools are drill. Follow the product instructions for the exact kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Wedge Bump Skate Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Wedge Bump differ from the GB Kicker?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Wedge Bump stands 12 inches high and is 38 inches wide, creating a broader compact launch. The GB Kicker is nine inches high and 19 inches wide to match a Grind Box. Choose the Wedge for general connections and the GB for that specific pairing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWho should choose a Wedge Bump instead of a full Bank Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the Wedge Bump when a compact four-foot connector can link gaps, rails, or boxes and the layout needs to stay flexible. Choose the eight-foot-wide Bank when a broad, substantial bank face should anchor a dedicated spot as opposed to move around it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Wedge Bump compare with Jordan Hoffart's Speed Bump?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Wedge Bump is a compact four-foot takeoff and connector. The Speed Bump is a broader eight-foot signed feature intended to carry more of the route. Choose the Wedge for flexibility and the Speed Bump when the larger shape deserves a settled role.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the Wedge Bump Skate Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Wedge Bump Skate Ramp as a line-building obstacle for launches, ollies, and other tricks that fit its exact shape. Give the feature a straight approach and clear landing or exit, then progress from basic rollovers and controlled launches within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Wedge Bump Skate Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps and obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39508545372343,"sku":"wedge\/bump","price":319.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/wedge3.jpg?v=1729241276"},{"product_id":"bank-skateboard-ramp","title":"Bank Skateboard Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMake a straight bank part of your everyday spot\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere is more than one way to bring a slope into a skate setup. This eight-foot-wide Bank gives you a broad, straight incline, with room to choose your approach across the face. It is a substantial ramp for a dedicated part of your spot, supplied as a kit with photo instructions so you can build around the skating you want.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose the \u003cem\u003eslope you want to skate\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA bank has a straight inclined face; a quarter pipe curves through a transition. That changes the movement you repeat before height and width even enter the decision. Choose this Bank when a broad straight slope belongs in your session, whether it becomes a main feature or part of a larger route. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains the difference.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive eight feet of bank room to work\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bank measures eight feet wide, seven feet five inches deep and three feet two inches high. Put those measurements on the ground, then include the space you need to approach and leave it. This is one fixed-size ramp, so check the full layout before ordering. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you account for access as well as skating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlan the position before moving the ramp\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRear caster wheels help reposition the Bank when the layout changes. At 350 pounds, it still needs a deliberate moving plan rather than a quick carry between sessions. Think through the route to the final location and leave room to settle the ramp before use. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/shipping-delivery\"\u003eShipping and Delivery guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you plan how the parts will reach your build area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSet aside time to build your bank\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe kit includes assembly hardware and a photo instruction booklet. You will need a drill and wrench, with an estimated two to three hours for assembly. Organize the work area around the size of the finished ramp, and leave time to check the build before skating. If you want help with assembly, explore \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/installations\"\u003eOC Ramps installation services\u003c\/a\u003e for your project and location.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eProtect the plywood riding face\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bank uses a plywood riding face and specifies two quarts of Skate Paint for its exposed wood. That is a protective coating, not an included Skatelite surface. If you are considering a separate riding panel, its fit, supporting layers and quantity need their own plan. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-surface\"\u003eRiding Surfaces guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains the different roles before you choose materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Bank Skateboard Ramp\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFreight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis 350-pound ramp ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor Bank Skateboard Ramp, assembly is estimated at 2-3 hours and the tools are drill and wrench. Follow the product instructions for the exact kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Bank Skateboard Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow is the Bank Skateboard Ramp different from a compact Wedge Bump?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bank is a full eight-foot-wide, 350-pound ramp built for a substantial dedicated spot. A Wedge Bump is a much smaller connector or launch point. Choose the Bank when a broad bank face is the primary feature, not an accessory between other obstacles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I choose a different Bank Skateboard Ramp size at checkout?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Bank is offered as one 8-foot-wide, 7-foot-5-inch-deep, 3-foot-2-inch-high configuration. Confirm that complete ramp body, plus its run-in and roll-away, fits before ordering. If the site needs a smaller footprint, compare a different ramp instead of expecting a Bank size selector.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Bank Skateboard Ramp compare with Launch WR?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bank is an eight-foot-wide, 350-pound ramp with one broad straight face. Launch WR is a compact two-foot-wide obstacle with separate launch and wallie faces. Choose the Bank when a substantial straight incline should anchor the site; choose Launch WR when two smaller working faces and planned movement better fit the session.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the Bank Skateboard Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Bank Skateboard Ramp as a line-building obstacle for launches, ollies, and other tricks that fit its exact shape. Give the feature a straight approach and clear landing or exit, then progress from basic rollovers and controlled launches within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Bank Skateboard Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps and obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39508551467191,"sku":"The Bank","price":1269.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/OCramps_RawRamp_3.jpg?v=1729241276"},{"product_id":"skatelite-4-x8","title":"4 x 8 Skatelite Ramp Surface Panel","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eChoose the surface you will skate\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring a smooth, fast riding surface to the ramp you skate every day. Skatelite's paper-composite panels are made for outdoor action-sports use, from skateboards and scooters to BMX bikes and roller skates. Choose natural wood tan, with optional preparation for your OC Ramps kit to simplify the installation work.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGive the ramp a smooth \u003cem\u003efinal skating surface\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkatelite's smooth, fast surface gives riders a consistent material to return to through daily sessions. The paper-composite panel becomes the final riding surface over the ramp's supporting construction. Choose it for the part of the build your wheels meet on every run.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLay out the four-by-eight-foot sheets\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach sheet is four feet by eight feet and one-quarter inch thick. Use those dimensions to plan the cuts and sheet layout for the ramp you are surfacing. Work from the actual ramp measurements so you can account for the pieces your project needs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild for a shared action-sports session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkatelite is designed for skateboards, scooters, BMX bikes and roller skates. That makes it a surface to consider when different riders share the ramp. Match the ramp's layout to the activities you want to host, with the same natural wood-tan finish across the riding surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGet the preparation done for your OC Ramps kit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose pre-drilling, countersinking and cutting to size when ordering sheets for an OC Ramps kit. The service handles those tasks before installation, giving your build fewer preparation steps. DIY builders can order without the service and prepare the sheets to their own ramp design.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose an outdoor riding surface\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkatelite is made for outdoor ramp use, with weather resistance suited to a surface that sees regular sessions outside. Keep the complete ramp's care in the routine as well, including exposed wood and fasteners. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you look after the setup around the riding surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003eOne 4-by-8-foot, quarter-inch Natural Wood Tan Skatelite Pro panel in the selected prep configuration\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eConfirm surface-sheet shipping\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOC Ramps will confirm the shipping cost for the exact sheet quantity and order configuration. Standalone and bundled surface-sheet terms must not be inferred from the sitewide shipping message.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFreight delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis product ships by freight. OC Ramps will confirm delivery timing and the receiving requirements for the exact order. Inspect the shipment when it arrives and report visible damage promptly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eInstall from the exact ramp plan\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne quantity is one panel. Use the 4-by-8-foot, quarter-inch Natural Wood Tan Skatelite Pro panel and the ramp's measured surface to determine seams, cuts, fasteners, and total quantity before installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about 4 x 8 Skatelite Pro Ramp Surface Panel\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow is Skatelite Pro different from Skate Paint?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkatelite Pro is a physical quarter-inch panel installed as the final riding surface. Skate Paint is a clear coating rolled onto real wood. Compare the ramp plan, desired riding layer, seams, cuts, budget, and maintenance approach before choosing. A sheet and a liquid coating do not solve the same construction job.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan Skatelite Pro be cleaned after wax, pad scuffs, or graffiti?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eCleaning is part of caring for the surface. Use the manufacturer's current cleaning directions for wax, pad scuffs or graffiti, including which products and methods are suitable. Check the riding surface after cleaning before putting the ramp back into use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWhich action sports can use this Skatelite Pro surface?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe surface is intended for skateboards, scooters, BMX bikes, and roller skates. That makes it useful for a shared action-sports ramp, though each discipline still needs appropriate site planning, protective equipment, and a ramp layout that fits the riders using it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow is a Skatelite Pro panel used?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eSkatelite Pro is installed as the final riding surface on a compatible skate ramp. Match the sheet count, thickness, and cut plan to the exact project, then protect any plywood that remains exposed rather than applying Skate Paint over the Skatelite surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the 4 x 8 Skatelite Pro Ramp Surface Panel if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/ramp-surface\"\u003eramp surfaces\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"None","offer_id":39607829168311,"sku":"Skatelite_pro_4x8","price":235.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pre-Drill + Countersink + Cut (OC Ramps kits ONLY)","offer_id":39607829201079,"sku":"Skatelite_pro_4x8_pre-drill_and_countersink","price":284.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/skatelite-pro-surface.jpg?v=1729241276"},{"product_id":"launch-wr","title":"Launch WR Skate Ramp","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTwo sides. A different trick to try.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCome at it one way for a launch. Take the other approach for a wallie. Launch WR brings those two jobs into one compact ramp, giving a home session somewhere new to go without adding a separate obstacle for each trick. Build it, leave both faces room to work and change the approach when you want a different challenge.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003e\n\u003cem\u003ePick a side\u003c\/em\u003e for the session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eLaunch WR combines a sloped launch face with a wallie face. A wallie uses contact with a more upright surface, so it asks for a different approach from riding up a launch. Choose the face that matches what you want to practice and your current ability. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-design\"\u003eRamp Shape guide\u003c\/a\u003e explains how different ramp profiles change the way you move through a setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMake both faces reachable\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe ramp stands 15 inches high, measures two feet wide and extends 52 inches long. Its two-sided design earns its place when the surrounding pavement lets you use both approaches. Include the run-up and landing for each in your measurements, instead of placing the wallie face against something that blocks it. Use the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/blogs\/buyers-guides\/skate-ramp-dimensions\"\u003eSpace and Fit guide\u003c\/a\u003e to plan that space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLet the layout change between sessions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eLaunch WR is made to be repositioned, so the same obstacle can serve different arrangements as you find new lines. Choose its position before skating, with a stable base and open approaches. If you would rather ride over two back-to-back transitions, compare the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/products\/micro-spine\"\u003eMicro Spine\u003c\/a\u003e; it gives a different two-sided movement within a narrow ramp.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuild both faces from one kit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Launch WR includes galvanized-steel coping, assembly hardware and photo instructions. Have a drill ready and allow about an hour as an assembly estimate. Keeping the parts and instructions together lets you work through the build before choosing the finished ramp's position. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/tools-needed-to-build-your-ramp\"\u003eKit Assembly guide\u003c\/a\u003e covers the preparation that helps the process go smoothly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeep the wood ready for another session\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne quart of Skate Paint is specified for the Launch WR's exposed plywood. Treat that as part of the wood-care plan, alongside where the ramp stays and what you inspect between sessions. Paint is a coating, not another riding-surface sheet. Our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/pages\/ramp-care\"\u003eRamp Care guide\u003c\/a\u003e helps you look after the ramp as you keep finding uses for both faces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat's in the Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne Launch WR ramp with galvanized-steel coping\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRequired assembly hardware\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhoto instruction booklet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch3\u003eFree shipping in the U.S.\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eShipping is free to the 48 contiguous states with no order minimum. Alaska and Hawaii require a shipping quote.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAssembly details\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eLaunch WR has an estimated one-hour assembly window and requires a drill. Once built, preserve a clear lane to both the launch and wallie faces instead of treating it as a one-way kicker.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eQuestions about Launch WR Skate Ramp\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does the Launch WR Skate Ramp compare with the GB Kicker?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eLaunch WR is a 15-inch obstacle with separate launch and wallie faces. The GB Kicker is a lower, narrower ramp designed to align with an OC Ramps Grind Box. Choose Launch WR when two distinct faces add useful variety; choose the GB Kicker when a compact Grind Box approach is the actual job.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow does Launch WR compare with the Bank Skateboard Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eLaunch WR is a portable two-foot-wide obstacle with launch and wallie faces. The Bank is an eight-foot-wide, 350-pound ramp meant for a much more substantial position. Choose Launch WR for compact variety and planned movement; choose the Bank when a broad straight face should anchor the site.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eWho should compare Launch WR with the Micro Spine?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompare them when two usable faces are important. Launch WR pairs a launch face with a wallie face, while Micro Spine uses two back-to-back transition faces. Choose the type of direction change the rider wants instead of assuming every two-sided obstacle serves the same practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eHow can riders use the Launch WR Skate Ramp?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the Launch WR Skate Ramp as a line-building obstacle for launches, ollies, and other tricks that fit its exact shape. Give the feature a straight approach and clear landing or exit, then progress from basic rollovers and controlled launches within the rider's ability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch4\u003eCan I return the Launch WR Skate Ramp if it is not the right fit?\u003c\/h4\u003e\u003cp\u003eEligible unused products may be requested for return within 30 calendar days of purchase when they are in original condition and packaging with all included parts and manuals. Customized, used, skated, damaged, or incomplete products are not eligible, and freight, original shipping, processing costs, and a restocking fee may apply. Review the current OC Ramps Return Policy before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/launch-ramps\"\u003elaunch ramps and obstacles\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/pages\/return-policy\"\u003eReview the OC Ramps Return Policy\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OC RAMPS","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":39508553367735,"sku":"LaunchWR","price":299.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0555\/5637\/4711\/products\/LaunchWR03.jpg?v=1729241277"}],"url":"https:\/\/ocramps.com\/collections\/all.oembed?page=4","provider":"OC Ramps","version":"1.0","type":"link"}